Skip to main content

Full text of "Beatrijs, a middle Dutch legend;"

See other formats


$B    20"i    ft^^ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/beatrijsmiddleduOObarnrich 


PUBLICATIONS  OF  THE  PHILOLOGICAL 

SOCIETY 

III 

BEATEIJS 

•A  MIDDLE  DUTCH  LEGEND- 

EDITED  FROM  THE  ONLY  EXISTING  MANUSCRIPT 

IN  THE  ROYAL  LIBRARY  AT  THE  HAGUE 

WITH  A  GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION,  NOTES 

AND  A  GLOSSARY 

BY 

A.  J.  BARNOUW 

LECTURER    IN    ENGLISH    IN   THE   UNIVERSITY 
OF    LEIDEN 


OXFORD  UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

LONDON    Amen  Corner  E  C  •  EDINBURGH  •  NEW  YORK 
TORONTO  .  MELBOURNE  •  BOMBAY 


OXFOED   UNIVERSITY  PRESS 

LONDON        EDINBURGH        GLASGOW        NEW   YORK 
TORONTO  MELBOURNE  BOMBAY 

HUMPHREY  MILFORD  M.A. 

PUBLISHER   TO   THE   UNIVERSITY 


By 


PREFACE 


This  book  would  not  have  been  prepared  without  the  friendly 
suggestion  and  encouragement  of  Dr.  W.  A.  Craigie,  President  of 
the  Philological  Society.  Students  of  the  English  language  are 
indebted  to  him  for  his  interest  in  those  Teutonic  languages 
which,  by  their  closer  relationship  to  the  Anglo-Saxon  tongue, 
are  more  likely  than  High  German  to  increase  our  knowledge  of 
the  history  of  the  English  language.  If  this  concise  manual  of 
Middle  Dutch  may  prove  a  useful  contribution  to  that  comparative 
study  of  which  Dr.  Craigie  is  the  chief  promoter,  I  shall  consider 
myself  amply  rewarded  for  my  labours. 

Eeaders  will  find  little  difficulty  in  consulting  the  book,  so  that 
directions  for  its  use  seem  superfluous.  I  have  not  been  sparing  in 
cross-references,  which  will  prove  helpful  to  beginners.  All  the 
examples  given  in  the  grammar  have  been  carefully  chosen  from 
the  text  of  the  Beatrijs.  For  the  meanings  of  the  words  quoted 
the  reader  may  consult  the  glossary  at  the  end  of  the  volume, 
and  from  this  glossary  he  is  referred  back  to  the  paragraphs  in  the 
grammar  which  give  him  information  concerning  the  phonetic 
form  and  the  inflexion  of  the  word  in  question. 

The  text  of  the  poem  as  printed  is  a  faithful  reproduction  of 
the  manuscript,  except  that  the  arbitrary  employment  of  v  and  ti 
by  the  mediaeval  scribe  has  been  replaced  by  the  systematic  use 
of  V  for  the  consonant  and  of  u  for  the  vowel  sound.  Abbrevia- 
tions have  been  expanded  throughout ;  to  indicate  them  by  italics 
seemed  a  needless  precision,  as  the  book  is  primarily  intended 
as  a  first  introduction  to  the  study  of  Middle  Dutch,  and  does  not 
claim  to  give  anything  more  than  a  readable  text  as  a  specimen 
of  the  language.  The  use  of  italics  seemed,  however,  unavoidable 
in  the  case  of  manuscript  oc,  the  e  of  which,   for  the  reader's 

442944 


iv  PKEFACE 

benefit,  has  been  replaced  throughout  by  o  where  o,  not  ud^  is  the 
sound  intended  (cf.  §  8). 

For  kindly  allowing  me  to  consult  the  manuscript  of  the 
Beatrijs  I  am  under  obligation  to  Dr.  N.  van  Wijk,  until  recently 
Keeper  of  the  Manuscripts  at  the  Koyal  Library,  The  Hague. 
And  my  final  thanks  are  again  due  to  my  friend  Dr.  Craigie,  who 
took  upon  himself  the  task  of  marking  the  Middle  Dutch  words 
in  my  manuscript  for  the  compositor  and  of  reading  the  proof- 
sheets.  I  have  reason  to  say  in  the  words  of  the  poet,  'selke 
minne  hetic  ghetrouwe '. 

The  Hague,  March  1914. 


'iT 


CONTENTS 

i  PAGE 

A  GRAMMAR  OF  MIDDLE  DUTCH. 

Introductory  Remarks,  §§1-5 1 

Stress,  §6 3 

Vowels,  §§  7-33. 

Spelling,  §8         ..........4 

Shoit  Votcels,  §§  9-19 5 

The  MDu.  development  of  Prim.  Gmc.  short  vowels,  §  9. 
Lengthening,  §§  10-11.  I- mutation,  §§  12-14.  Influence  of  r, 
§§15-16.  Influence  of  1,  §  17.  Influence  of  n,§  18.  Influence 
of  w,  §  19. 

Long  Vowels,  §§  20-22 10 

The  long  vowels  of  Prim.  Gmc,  §  20.  Their  MDu.  develop- 
ment, §  21.     Shortening,  §  22. 

Diphthongs,  §§  23-26 11 

The  MDu.  development  of  Prim.  Gmc.  diphthongs,  §  23. 
MDu.  ie  from  heterosyllabic  e/i—o/a,  §  24.  The  long  diph- 
thongs ai,  6i,  oei,  au,  eu,  ieu,  §  25.  MDu.  auw-  and  ouw-, 
§26. 

Vowels  in  Weak  Syllables,  §§  27-33 13 

Consonants,  §§  34-48. 

Prim.  Gmc.  consonants,  §  34.    West  Gmc.  consonants,  §  35       .     16 

Middle  Dutch  Consonant  Changes,  §§  36-48 16 

Unvoicing  of  voiced  conss.,  §  36.  Voiceless  stops,  §§  37-38. 
Voiced  stops,  §§  39-40.  Voiceless  open  conss.,  §§  41-42. 
Grammatical  change,  §  43.  -cht<ft,  §  44.  Voiced  open 
conss.,  §  45.    Nasals,  §  46.     Liquids,  §  47.     Semi-vowels,  §  48. 


vi  CONTENTS 

Accidence. 

PAGE 

Nouns,  §§  49-60. 

The  Strong  Declension,  §§  50-54 22 

Endings,  §  50.  Syncope,  §  51.  Neuter  monosyllabic  nouns 
without  a  plural  ending,  §  52.  Neuter  monosyllabic  nouns 
with  a  plural  in  ■er(e),  §  53.     Nouns  of  relationship,  §  54. 

The  Weak  Declension,  §§  55-57      .        .        .        .        .        .        .24 

Endings,  §  55.  Fusion  of  Gmc.  o-  and  jo-stems  with  the 
weak  declension,  §  56.  Fusion  of  strong  and  weak  plurals, 
§  57. 

6?mc?er,  §§  58-59 25 

Proper  Names,  §  60 .         .        .26 

Adjectives,  §§  61-69 26 

Fusion  of  Prim.  Gmc.  a-(ja-),  i-,  and  u-stems,  §  61.  Strong 
and  weak  declensions,  §  62.  Endings,  §  63.  The  ending  -ere, 
§  64.  Employment  of  strong  and  weak  forms,  §  65.  The  post- 
positive adjective,  §  66.    Adjectives  used  as  nouns,  §  67. 

The  Comparison  of  Adjectives,  §§  68-69 28 

Pronouns,  §§  70-79 29 

Personal,  §§  70-71  .        .        .        ...         .        .        .29 

Reflexive,  §  72 30 

Possessive,  §  73 30 

Demonstrative,  §§  74-76 .30 

The  simple  dem.  pron.  die,  dat,  §  74.  The  compound  dem. 
pron.  dese,  dit,  §  75.     ghene,  gone,  §  76. 

Interrogative,  ^11 31 

Relative,  ^1^ 32 

Indefinite,  §  79      .         .         .         .         .         .         .        .         .         .32 

{a)  Een  ;  (6)  ander ;  (c)  elc,  sulc,  enech,  somech,  menech 
{oidjj.)',  [d)  menech  {noun);  (e)  som(e) ;  (/)  al ;  (g)  vele  ; 
(h)  (n)iemen  ;  (i)  (njiet ;  {k)  men. 

Numerals,  §  80 .        .    34 


CONTENTS  vii 

PAGE 

Verbs,  §§  81-107. 

General  Remarks,  §  81.  Endings  of  the  present  tense,  §  82. 
Endings  of  the  preterite,  §  83 35 

Strong  Verbs,  §§  84-92 37 

Class  I,  §  85.  Class  II,  §  86.  Class  III,  §  87.  Class  IV, 
§88.    Class  V,  §89.    Class  VI,  §  90.    Class  VII,  §§  91-92. 

Weak  Verbfi 42 

Fusion  of  the  three  weak  classes  of  Prim.  Gmc.  into  one 
type,  §  93.  Alternation  of  single  and  double  conss.  closing  the 
verbal  stem,  §  94.  The  weak  preterite,  §§  95-96.  Irregular 
preterites,  §  97. 

Minor  Groups        . 44 

Preterite-Presents,  §  98.  Class  I,  weten,  §  99.  Class  II, 
doghen,  §  100.  Class  III,  onnen,  dorren,  dorven,  connen, 
§  101.  Class  IV,  sullen,  §  102.  Class  V,  moghen,  §  103. 
Class  VI,  moeten,  §  104.  doen,  §  105.  The  substantive  verb, 
§106.    willen,§107. 

BEATRIJS 47 

Notes 74 

Glossary 79 


BOOKS  OP  REFERENCE 

Middelnederlandsch  Woordenhoek,  van  wijlen  Dr.  E.  Verwijs  en   Dr.  J. 
Verdam,  vols.  I-VIII,  1885-1914. 

Middelnederlandsch  Handwoordenboeh,  bewerkt  door  J.  Verdam,  1911. 

Franck's  Etymologisch   Woordenboeh  der  Nederlandsche   Taal.     Tweede 
druk,  door  Dr.  N.  van  Wijk,  1910-12. 

Middelnederiandsche  Spraakkunst,  door  Dr.  W.  L.  van  Helten,  1887. 

MHtelniederldndische  Grammatik,  von  Johannes  Franck.     Zweite  Auflage, 
1910. 

Middelnederiandsche  Spraakkunst.    Syntaxis  door  Dr.  F.  A.  Stoett.    Tweede 
geheel  omgewerkte  druk. 


A  GRAMMAR  OF  MIDDLE  DUTCH 

1.  It  is  in  English  alone  that  the  mediaeval  name  of  the 
Netherlandish  language  survives.  The  Dutch  themselves  have 
rejected  it  because  of  its  ambiguity.  For  Dutch,  as  the  name  of 
the  language  spoken  in  the  Low  Countries,  is  a  restriction  of  its 
original  meaning.  In  the  Middle  Ages  the  name  included  all 
the  dialects  of  Germany  as  well.  The  word  is  derived  from  an 
old  Germanic  noun,  Gothic  piuda,  Old  English  peod,  Middle 
Dutch  diet,  meaning  *  people  ',  '  nation  \  and  was  used  to  denote 
the  vernacular  as  distinguished  from  Latin,  the  language  of  the 
Church.  It  could,  therefore,  be  applied  to  any  particular  dialect 
of  Continental  West  Germanic,  Frisian  alone  excepted.  Not  until 
the  rise  of  the  Dutch  Kepublic  in  the  seventeenth  century  did 
f;he  language  of  the  Netherlands  assume  a  separate  name,  that 
of  Hollandish  (Hollandsch),  which  originally  designated  the  dialect 
of  the  most  powerful  of  the  United  Provinces,  the  name  of  Dutch 
{Duitsch)  being  thenceforward  restricted  to  the  German  language. 

2.  Although  in  the  Middle  Ages  the  Dutch  language  shared  its 
name  with  the  vernacular  of  Germany,  it  yet  may  claim  an 
independent  position  as  the  vehicle  of  a  flourishing  literature, 
^vhich  has  little  in  common  with  the  contemporary  literature  of 
Germany.  This  mediaeval  literature  employs  a  language  com- 
pounded of  the  dialects  of  Flanders  and  Brabant,  then  the  most 
prosperous  and  important  provinces  of  the  Low  Countries.  Even 
authors  who  were  natives  of  other  parts,  such  as  the  Hollander 
Melis  Stoke,  the  writer  of  a  rhymed  chronicle  of  the  Counts 
of  Holland,  expressed  themselves  in  this  composite  Southern 
idiom,  though  each  added  to  the  literary  language  from  the  store 
of  his  native  dialect. 

3.  The  aim  of  the  present  introduction  must,  consequently,  be 
to  give  a  survey  of  the  grammatical  structure  of  this  literary 
Middle  Dutch,  the  written  /cotvi}  of  that  period  which  may  be 
reckoned  to  extend  from  the  middle  of  the  twelfth  to  the  middle 
of  the  sixteenth  century.     The  term  Middle  Dutch  implies  the 

1466-3  TJ 


I 


?;••.       \  /::.::  ;         BEATRIJS 

;e»i9teij(ie.of.an  pl(Jer.  phase  of  the  language,  between  which  and 
•  U^To^^rh* Dulfch  JLt;  iferja^  the  connecting  link.  But,  unfortunately, 
this  Old  Dutch  period,  corresponding  in  time  to  Old  English 
as  Middle  Dutch  does  to  Middle  English,  is  represented  by  one 
document  only,  a  tenth-century  version  of  a  few  psalms,  a  scanty 
remnant  of  an  age  which  in  England  saw  the  rise  of  a  flourishing 
prose  literature. 

4.  For  the  English  student  who  has  a  working  knowledge 
of  Old  and  Middle  English  there  is  no  urgent  need  to  study  this 
fragmentary  psalter  by  way  of  introduction  to  the  language  of  the 
subsequent  period.  The  Old  and  Middle  English  forms  will  prove 
equally  useful  to  him  in  explaining  those  of  Middle  Dutch.  For 
the  two  languages  are  closely  related  :  Old  Dutch,  otherwise  called 
Old  Low  Franconian,  is  a  dialect  of  the  West  Germanic  branch  of 
the  Teutonic  family  of  languages,  which  also  includes  Old  High 
German,  Old  Saxon,  Old  Frisian,  and  Old  English. 

5.  The  bulk  of  literary  Middle  Dutch  is  essentially  Franconiai 
(more  precisely  West  Franconian,  whereas  the  language  of  the 
Old  Dutch  psalter  is  East  Franconian),  with  an  admixture   o\ 
Frisian  and  Saxon,  the  two  other  West  Germanic  dialects  whicl 
were  spoken  in  the  non-Franconian  parts  of  the  Low  Countries- 
Frisian  in  the  North  and  all  along  the  sea-coast  as  far  south  as  th< 
Flemish  border,  Saxon  in  the  eastern  provinces  of  Drente,  Overijsel, , 
and  the  County  of  Zutfen.     Foreign  influences  have  not  affected  i 
the   Germanic  character   of  the   language.      Early  Latin   loans  .J 
borrowed  in  or  before  the  Old  Dutch  period,  have  been  naturalizecjl 
and  are  in  no  way  distinguishable  from  native  words.     French  1 
borrowings,  on  the  other  hand,  are  easDy  recognized  as  such  bj  j 
their  stress  falling  on  the  final  syllable  (§  6).      French  sounds 
were,  as  a  rule,  assimilated  to  the  vowels  and  consonants  of  the 
vernacular,   so   that  the  Germanic  phonology  of  Middle  Dutch 
was  neither  changed  nor  enriched   by  these    foreign  adoptions. 
Exceptional  un-Dutch  sounds  are  the  tj  in  chierheit  and  the  dg  in 
vergier,  Geronde,  Gisemast  (cf.  §  44). 

Early  Latin  loan-words:  abt  (<  ahhdtem,  §  6),  clooster 
(<  claustrum,  §  23),  monnic,  nonne,  mettine  (<  (hora) 
mat{u)tina,  §§  6,  12),  kerke  (§  15),  cruce,  engel,  duvel  (§  23, 
n.  1),  outaer  (§§  6,  17),  mure,  strata,  poort  (§  16),  venster 
(§  6),  keyser,  paert  (§  6),  wijn,  spise  (<  spesa  <  spensa,  §  20), 
pine  {<pena,  §  20),  wile  (<  velum,  §  20),  side  (<  seda,  §  20), 
brief  (<  hreve,  §  20),  dichten,  pont. 


i 


GKAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION 


Stress 

e.  Dutch,  as  a  member  of  the  Germanic  group  of  languages, 
lays  the  principal  stress  on  the  stem  syllable,  which  in  simple 
words  is  always  the  initial  syllable.  In  compound  words  the 
accentuation  in  primitive  Germanic  varied  according  to  the  nature 
of  the  composition,  nominal  compounds  (noun  +  noun,  or  particle  + 
noun)  being  stressed  on  the  first  element,  verbal  ones  (particle  + 
verb)  on  the  second. 

noun  +  noun :  a'vont-stont,  e*rt-rike,  jo*nc-here,  clo'c- 
seel,  li'c-hame  (§  32),  me-tten-stonde,  &c. 

particle  +  noun  ;  a*nt-wort,  OT-conde,  o*r-lof,  oT-deel, 
wa'n-hope,  we*der-moet,  o*n-reeht,  &c. 

particle  +  verb :  onder-vi*nden,  onder-cu'ssen,  and  all 
verbs  with  the  prefixes  be-,  ghe-,  ont-,  ver-. 

Verbs  derived  from  nominal  compounds  retain  the  accent  of  the 
noun,  as  a'nt-worden,  oTconden. 

Nouns  with  the  prefixes  be-,  ghe-,  and  ver-  have  their  stress 
on  the  second  element.  The  stress  of  adjectives  with  the  prefix 
on-  fluctuates  just  as  in  Middle  English  (cf.  Morsbach,  ME.Gramm., 
§  24).  The  sufl&x  -inne  (Gmc.  *'injo-,  OE.  -en)  is  always  stressed, 
owing  to  a  tendency  to  emphasize  the  distinction  between  the 
male  and  the  female:  e.g.  godi'une  (OE.  gy'den),  keyseri'nne, 
costeri'nne,  vriendi'nne. 

After  the  Primitive  Germanic  period  a  new  kind  of  compound 
verbs  arose  in  each  of  the  West  Germanic  languages.  These 
might  be  called  semi-compounds,  as  either  element  maintains  an 
independent  position  in  the  sentence.  The  first  element  has  the 
principal  accent  and  is  separable  from  the  verb  of  which  it  forms 
a  part.  Such  are  the  verbs  with  the  prefixes  af-,  ane-,  mede-, 
neder-,  op-,  toe-,  ute-,  voren-. 

Note,  ophe'ffen  (1.  6)  has  the  stress  on  the  stem  of  the 
vex'b,  as  appears  from  the  particle  being  inseparable  from  the 
stem.  If  it  belonged  to  the  semi-compounds,  the  p.p.  would 
be  opgheheven  (cf.  §  83). 

Early  Latin  loan-words  adopted  the  Germanic  accentuation  : 

abt  <  abhd'temj  do'rmter  <  dormito'ritmi,  me'ttine  < 
mat{u)ti'naj  outer  <  dltd-re,  venster  <  fenestra,  paert  <^ant- 
vere'dm, 

b2 


4  BEATRIJS 

French  borrowings  retained  their  foreign  accent : 

ahdi'sse,  dbij't,  almonie're,  absolve' r en,  conforte'ren,  aventwrCf 
henedi'en,  eglentie'r,  fonteyne,  formij'n,  foree'st,  heytij'f,  confuws, 
cordewae'n,  mira'cle,  natwre,  orloy,  orname'nt,  jpenite'ncie,  pre- 
tioo's,  rossi'de,  sacristie',  saluwt,  termij-n,  caproe'tij  perdoe'rif 
sermoe'rij  vysioe'n. 

Latin  words  adopted  after  the  Old  Dutch  period  were  not  able 
to  shift  their  accent  on  to  the  first  syllable  : 
carita'te,  religioo'n. 

VOWELS 

7.  The  vocalism  of  Middle  Dutch  consisted  of — 

(1)  Short  vowels :  a,  e,  i,  9,  o,  u,  a. 

(2)  Long  vowels  :  a,  e,  e,  i,  6,  o,  u,  6. 

(3)  Short  diphthongs  (with  a  short  first  element) : 

el,  ou,  ie,  oe. 

(4)  Long  diphthongs : 

ai,  oi,  oei,  au,  eu,  ieu. 
In  a,  originally  long  a  and  lengthened  S,  have  coalesced,  e  and 
6,  the  lengthenings  of  Germanic  e,  i  and  0,  u  must  have  been 
slightly  different  in  sound  from  the  originally  long  e  and  6,  as  the 
poet  of  the  Beatrijs  never  rhymes  e  +  e,  6  +  6.  Before  -r,  how- 
ever, the  latter  pair  seem  to  have  sounded  alike  to  him : 

11.  481-2  ghehoort  (o)  +  voort  (6). 
11.  545-6  ghehoort  (o)  +  woort  (6). 
11.  723-4  horen  +  te  voren. 
11.  959-60  hoort  +  versmoort. 
11.  975-6  hoorde  +  worde. 

ie  and  oe  were  on  their  way  to  become  monophthongs  (i  and  u  ^), 
which  they  actually  were  in  the  combinations  ieu  and  oei,  and 
before  r.'^  A  complete  coalescence  of  ie  with  i  never  took  place, 
as  ie  in  Modern  Dutch  has  become  i,  and  i  has  been  diphthongized 
to  ei,  except  before  r. 

8.  Spelling.  Vowel  length  is  hardly  ever  indicated  in  open 
syllables,  as  short  quantity  never  occurred  in  that  position,  all 
originally  short  vowels  having  been  lengthened  in  open  syllables. 
There  are  two  ways  of  indicating  length  in  closed  syllables,  either 
by  doubling  the  vowel  symbol,  or  by  an  additional  e.  The  former 

1  Probably  a  lower  variety  of  u,  between  u  and  5. 

2  Hence  such  spellings  as  mier  <  mire  <  mijnre  (1.  630). 


¥ 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  5 

practice  is  the  usual  one  in  the  case  of  e,  i  and  ii,  i  being  written 
ij  to  avoid  confusion  of  11  with  u  ;  the  latter  method  is  used  for 
a  and  o,  written  ae  and  oe.  There  is  no  reason  to  alter  this 
system,  except  in  the  case  of  oe,  which  also  stands  for  the  diph- 
thong ua  and  for  6.  In  the  present  edition,  therefore,  oo  is  every- 
where substituted  for  the  oe  of  the  manuscript,  where  6  and  o 
from  Gmc.  au  is  meant.  Such  seeming  homonyms  as  bloet 
(pron.  blot,  OE.  Meat),  11.  262,  486,  935,  and  bloet  (pron.  hludt,  OE. 
Udd),  1.  712,  as  vroe  (pron.  vro)^  11.  830,  899,  and  vroe  (pron.  vrud)^ 
11.  67,  434,  loach (pret.  oilieghen),  1.  591,  and  loech  (pret.  oilachen), 
1.  274,  are  thereby  differentiated  in  spelling  in  accordance  with 
their  different  pronunciation.  The  diphthong  ua  is  sometimes 
spelt  ue,  probably  a  traditional  spelling  reflecting  an  older  stage 
of  its  development  from  Gmc.  o.  But  this  same  digraph  may 
stand  for  u.  In  1.  140  both  sounds  occur  in  the  same  spelling : 
tsuete  (pron.  tsudtd)  metten  sueren  (pron.  zitrdn).  The  sound  6  is 
not  represented  by  a  special  symbol.  Its  usual  spelling  is  o  in 
open  syllables  and  oe  in  closed  ones  (cf.  §  14). 

The  quantity  of  the  first  elements  of  diphthongs  is  generally 
left  unindicated,  au  being  more  usual  than  aeu,  and  eu  being 
preferred  to  eeu.  1  as  the  first  or  second  element  of  diphthongs 
is  often  spelt  y. 

Short  Vowels 

9.  The  short  vowels  of  Primitive  Germanic  were  a,  e,  %  o,  u. 
Germanic  u  occurred  only  before  a  nasal  +  consonant  and  before  an 
u,  i,  or  j  in  the  next  syllable.  The  Middle  Dutch  development  of 
these  vowels  varies  according  to  their  position  in  closed  or  open 
syllables.  In  closed  syllables  they  retained  their  Germanic 
quality,  with  the  sole  exception  of  Uj  unless  the  influence  of 
surrounding  sounds  disturbed  their  stability  (cf.  §§  12-19). 
Germanic  u,  if  not  modified  by  i-mutation  (§  13),  was  lowered  to  o 
(in  Modern  Dutch  a  mid  back  wide  round  vowel),  different  in  sound 
from  MDu.  and  Modern  Dutch  o  <  Gmc.  o  (low  back  narrow 
rounded),  and  corresponding  to  u  in  OE.  and  ME. 

ghesont  (OE.  gesund\  gront  (OE.  grund),  hongher  (OE. 
hungor),  hont  (OE.  hund),  connen  (OE.  cimnom\  locht  (Gmc. 
*luftuz),  mont  (OE.  mup\  on-  (OE.  un-),  onder  (OE.  imder), 
onnen  (OE.  unnan),  ons  (OE.  €is),  or-  (OE.  or- ;  cf.  Wright, 
O.E.G.,  §  111,  note),  pont  (OE.  pitnd)^  sonder  (OE.  sundor), 
wonden  (OE.  immdian),  wonder  (OE.  wundor). 


6  BEATRIJS 

Note.  The  vowel  in  the  prefix  ont-  is  not  from  Gmc.  w, 
but  a,  and  owes  its  exceptional  development  to  the  unaccented 
position  of  the  syllable.  The  corresponding  stressed  form  of 
the  prefix  occurs  in  the  noun  a'nt-word  (OE.  and-wyrde). 

10.  Lengthening.  In  open  syllables,  i.e.  before  short  intei-vocalic 
consonants,  all  Germanic  short  vowels  were  lengthened  in  Middle 
Dutch.  The  lengthening  of  the  two  high  vowels  went  along  with 
lowering,  the  result  being  e  and  6,  affording  an  exact  parallel  to 
the  few  cases  in  which  lengthening  of  ME.  i  and  u  took  place  : 

weke  (OS.  wiJca,  ME.  weke  <  OE.  wicu),  beelde  (<  OLFr. 
hilithe),  beven  (OE.  hifian),  hemel  (<  OLFr.  Mmel),  lit,  plur. 
lede,  neder  (OE.  niper),  sede  (OE.  sidu),  seder  (app.  with  e 
from  shortened  i,  OE.  slpor),  seker  (OE.  sicor),  seven  (<  OLFr. 
sivon),  weduwe  (<  OLFr.  widowa),  weten  (OE.  witan);  dore 
(OS.  duru,  ME.  dore  <  OE.  duru),  ghewone  (OE.  gewuna), 
sone  (OE.  sunu). 

The  result  of  this  MDu.  lengthening  was  a  complete  coalescence 
of  Gmc.  e  and  i,  and  of  o  and  u  in  open  syllables.  Cases  of  6  <  w 
are  scarce,  as  Gmc.  u  was  mostly  followed  by  an  i  or  j  in  the  next 
syllable,  so  that  its  lengthening  in  MDu.  is  generally  modified  by 
i-mutation  (cf.  §  14).     But  e<e  and  ^<i  often  occur  as  rhymes  : 

11.  587-8  weken  (i)  +  spreken  (e),  11.  5-6  bleven  (i)  + 
heven  (e  <  Gmc.  a  through  i-mutation ;  cf.  §  12). 

11.  This  lengthening  is  also  carried  out  in  originally  closed 
syllables  ending  in  a  short  consonant  when  an  enclitic  with  initial 
vowel  sound  follows.  The  intervocalic  consonant  becomes  the 
initial  sound  of  the  enclitic  syllable,  opening  thereby  the  preceding 
syllable  : 

waest  <  wd'set  <  was  et 

eest  <  e'set  <  es  et. 

bequaemt  (1.  404)  <  lequd'met  <  hequam  et. 

traect  (1.  809)  <  trd'Jcet  <  trac  et. 

12.  1-Mutation.  J-mutation  does  not  play  such  an  important 
part  in  the  vocalic  development  of  MDu.  as  it  does  in  the  OE. 
vowel  system.  It  modifies  only  short  vowels,  and  of  these  a  alone 
is  systematically  affected  by  it,  except  before  ht  and  WGermanic 
long  X  (spelt  c/^),  which  counteract  the  mutation : 

machtlg  (Gmc.  ^maxtigas,  OE.  mihtig),  lachen  (Goth,  hlali- 
jan,  OE.  hliehhan). 


^fhi 


GKAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION 


e  «-mutation  must  have  set  in  before  the  lengthening  in  open 
syllables  was  carried  out,  as  lengthened  a  appears  as  e,  whereas 
original  a  was  not  modified  by  it.  Mutated  a  and  original  e  are 
identical  sounds  in  MDu.,  as  appears  from  the  rhymes  : 

11.  225-6  ghebede  (e)  +  stede  (a+i). 
jg  11.  153-4  begheert  (e)  +  deert  (a+i). 

A  tendency  to  level  cognate  words  to  one  unvarying  form  has 
almost  entirely  obliterated  the  original  alternation  of  a  and  e 
in  inflexion  and  conjugation.  A  rare  example  of  both  forms 
existing  side  by  side  is  afforded  by  the  inflexion  of  the  noun  stat 
or  stede  (cf.  §  50,  note).  The  usual  process  is  the  extension  of  the 
unmutated  form,  as  in  the  2nd  and  3rd  pers.  sing.  pres.  ind.,  which 
are  levelled  to  the  forms  of  the  1st  pers.  sing,  and  the  plural  : 

ic  vare  (OE.  ic  fare),  du  varest  (OE.  pu  fder{e)st),  hi  varet 
(OE.  Jiefder(e)/^). 

The  opposite  phenomenon,  extension  of  the  mutated  forms  at 
the  expense  of  those  with  original  a,  is  of  rare  occurrence.  It  is 
found  in  ghewelt  (OLFr.  geivald),  which  is  originally  the  form 
of  the  gen.  and  dat.  sing.  The  regular  form  of  the  nom.  ace.  sing, 
is  ghewout,  which  actually  occurs  (cf.  ghewouden,  vb.,  1.  648). 
Ghewelt  may  owe  its  prevalence  to  the  support  of  the  adj.  ghe- 
weldech  (1.  703). 

Exx.  bedde  (Goth,  fca^i,  OE.  l)§dd),  beter,  best  (Goth. 
hati^a,  hatists),  el  (cf.  Goth,  aljis),  elendech  (cf.  OE.  ^l(e)lfn- 
disc),  elf  (OE.  delf,  pi.  ielfe),  ende  (Goth,  andeis),  mensche 
(Goth.  mannisJcs),  mes  (OE.  m^t{e)seax),  mettine  (MLat.  mat- 
tina),  Pennine  (QiE.ppiing),  vremde  (G^oih..  framapeis),  wedde 
(Goth,  wadi),  and  a  great  many  verbs  of  the  first  weak  or  -jan- 
class  (cf.  §  93). 

With  subsequent  lengthening :  beke  (OE.  hgce),  deren 
(OE.  dorian),  menech  (OE.  manig,  m^nig),  heven  (p.p.  oiheffen), 
ghescepen  (p.p.  of  sceppen). 

Note,  bat  (OE.  hgt)  is  probably  based  upon  Gmc.  *hats, 
whereas  OE.  h^t  <  Gmc.  %atiz  (Goth,  hatis). 

13.  Gmc.  0,  MDu.  g,  was  not  capable  of  i-mutation,  as  it  was 
never  followed  by  an  i  or  j,  it  being  a  lowering  of  Gmc.  u  when 
followed  by  an  a,  6,  or  e  in  the  next  syllable.  Gmc.  u,  MDu.  o,  is 
the  only  vowel  beside  a  that  is  affected  by  it.  Where  Gmc.  u 
stood  before  an  i  or  j  of  the  next  syllable,  MDu.  has  u,  in  Mod.Du. 
a  mid  front  narrow  rounded  vowel,  corresponding  to  OE.  «/,  ME.  ?, 
HG.u: 


8  BEATKIJS 

gheluc  (HG.  glilck),  guldijn  (OE.  gylden),  hulpe  (HG. 
hulfe),  cussen  (OE.  cyssan,  ME.  Msse),  ghecusten  (cf.  OE. 
cyst,  *  choice '),  luttel  (OS.  luttil),  ruste  (Gmc.  *rustidn-),  sulk 
(OS.  suUJc),  sullen  (with  the  mutated  vowel  from  the  subjunc- 
tive, OE.  scyle)y  vuUen  (OE.  fyllan,  ME.  fille),  wuUen  (OE. 
wyllen). 

Note  1.  Dul  beside  dol  may  be  due  to  the  Gmc.  alterna- 
tion of  dtv-  and  rf-forms.  WuUe  (OE.  wulle-)  is  probably- 
derived  from  the  adjective  wuUen. 

Note  2.  Exceptional  spellings  with  double  u  occur  in 
gheluux  (1.  60)  and  must  (1.  569). 

The  change  is  counteracted  by  r  +  cons.,  and  in  Flemish  (whence 
also  in  the  literary  *  koins  ')  before  n  +  cons. ,  whereas  Brabantic  has 
u  in  the  latter  case  : 

antworden  (OE.  andwyrdan),  gordel  (OE.  gyrdel). 
omme  (OE.  ymhe),  sonde  (HG.  sunde). 
Brabantic  :  dunken  (OE.  />yncan). 

14.  It  is  difficult  to  ascertain  the  quality  of  the  mutated 
6  <  Gmc.  u  in  open  syllables,  as  the  usual  spelling  is  o  or  oe. 
The  noun  dore  may  have  either  6,  corresponding  to  OE.,  OS. 
duru,  or  o  stands  for  o,  and  dore  corresponds  to  the  OLFr.  forms 
duri,  OHG.  turi.  The  rhyme  dore  +  hore  (11.  795-6)  does  not 
afford  a  clue,  as  the  pronunciation  of  hore  is  not  certain  (cf.  §  15). 
Verhoghen  (OE.  hycgean,  Jmgian)  rhymes  with  ghetoghen 
(11.  117-18),  which  points  to  an  o-pronunciation.  The  same 
conclusion  is  to  be  drawn  from  the  rhyme  voren  (OE. /orow) + 
scoren  (11.  737-8).  The  spelling  doeghet  (1.  391)  does  not  prove 
a  fronted  sound  (o),  as  it  is  also  found  in  1.  904  (ghedoeghet), 
where  it  can  stand  for  6  only.  Besides,  the  noun  doghet  (1.  4), 
which  has  the  same  vowel  as  the  verb  in  1.  391,  is  spelt  with 
a  single  o.  All  these  words  have  a  fronted  vowel  (mid  front  round) 
in  Modern  Dutch,  spelt  eu :  deur^  verjieugen,  scheuren,  dcugt,  deugd^ 
but  in  view  of  the  rhymes  it  is  not  very  likely  that  this  pronuncia- 
tion must  be  attributed  to  the  poet  of  the  Beatrijs.  The  same 
remark  applies  to  the  vowel  in  covel  and  slotel  (Mod.Du.  Jceuvel^ 
sleutel),  which  do  not  occur  as  rhymes  in  our  text.  We  are 
probably  right  in  assuming  6  as  the  correct  pronunciation  of  the 
vowel  in  all  these  words.  An  exceptional  case  is  evel  (OE.  yfeTjj 
which  never  appears  as  *(weZ,  e  being  evidently  the  unrounding  of 
0  (Mod.Du.  etivel). 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  9 

15.  Influence  of  r,  H  must  have  had  a  strong  a-timbre,  espe- 
cially in  Flemish,  as  e,  not  only  before  r  +  cons.,  but  also  before 
single  r,  is  changed  to  a.  Our  poem,  however,  the  work  of  a 
native  of  Brabant,  has  e  throughout,  except  in  a  few  cases  with 
simultaneous  lengthening : 

hare  <  here  <  hira,  vertaren  (OE.  teran),  waerde. 

The  opposite  change  of  a  >  e  took  place  before  r+lip  or  back 
conss.  (cf.  §  87,  note  2) : 

erch  (OE.  earg),  derven  (OE.  ^earfian),  ontfermenisse  (cf. 
OE.  of-earmian),  werf  (OE.  Jiwearf),  but  arm  (adj.  1.  504  and 
sb.  1.  935),  stare  (11.  75,  106). 

Note.  The  alternation  of  a  and  e  in  the  suffix  -waert 
(-wert)  is  Prim.Gmc. :  OE.  •w{e)ard,  Goth,  wairps,  OHG. 
•wart  and  -wert. 

i  became  e  before  r : 

kerke  (OS.  Mrika,  HG.  Mrche),  derde  (OE.  pridda,  cf.  §  47). 

e  became  o  in  worpen,  evidently  through  the  combined  influence 
of  to  and  r.  The  6  (o  ?)  in  hore  (hore  ?)  may  be  due  to  weakening, 
or  (if  6  =  6)  to  dialectal  o-mutation,  hore  going  back  to  earlier 
Viero  <  Viiro,  the  d.s.  fern,  and  g.pl.  of  the  pers.  pron. 

16.  Before  r  +  cons.,  short  vowels  tended  to  lengthening.  The 
orthography  does  not  record  the  long  quantity  consistently.  Our 
text  has  woort  (1.  546)  beside  wort  (1.  112),  voort  (1.  401)  beside 
vort  (1.  911),  paerde  (1.  413)  rhyming  with  warde  (1.  414), 
aermoede  (1.  425)  beside  armoede  (1.  557),  gheerne  (1.  98)  beside 
gherne  (1.  143).  To  judge  from  the  spelling,  the  long  quantity  of  e 
was  less  distinct  than  that  of  a  and  o.  The  other  short  vowels 
did  not  occur  in  this  position  (cf.  §§  13,  15). 

aert  (OE.  eard),  vaert  (OE.  Jlerd,  Gmc.  *far^i-),  -waert 
(OE.  -iveard),  scaerlaken  (MLat.  scarlatum),  poort  (OE.  port), 

17.  Influence  of  I.  The  groups  -aid,  -alt,  -old,  -olt  became  -oud, 
-out,  the  w-glide  between  the  vowel  and  the  I  first  having  rounded 
the  a,  after  which  the  I  was  absorbed  by  the  new  diphthong.  The 
groups  -uld,  -ult  (whose  u  =  Gmc.  u  before  an  i  or  j  of  the  next 
syllable  ;  cf.  §  13)  remained  intact.  Hence  MDu.  has  guldijn 
(OE.  gylden)  beside  gout  (OE.  gold),  sculdech  (OE.  scyldig)  beside 
scout. 

houden  (OE.  h(e)aldan),  out  (OE.  {e)ald),  verbouden  (cf. 


10  BEATKIJS 

OE.  h{e)ald),  menechfout  (OE.  manigj{e)ald),  outaer  (Lat. 
altare),  ghewouden  (OE.  wealdan),  onbescouden,  onver- 
gouden  (OE.  unforgolden),  soude  (OE.  scoUe),  hout  (OE.  holt). 

Note.  This  ^f-timbre  of  I  is  also  responsible  for  the  round- 
ing of  e  in  hulpen  <  helpen  (1.  800). 

18.  Influence  of  n.  Before  w  +  cons.,  e  (in  this  position  always 
^-mutation  of  a  in  native  words,  as  Gmc.  had  i  before  nasal  +  cons.) 
was  raised  to  i.  The  spelling  reflects  the  change  only  occasionally. 
Forms  with  e  and  with  i  occur  side  by  side  in  the  same  texts. 

(be-,  ghe-)dinken  (OE.  J^^ncean,  11.  353,  528),  ghehinghen 
(<  *hangjan,  1.  704),  inde  (OE.  ^nde,  11.  389,  595,  848)  beside 
ende  (1.  12),  kinnen  (OE.  c^nnan,  11.  208,  220,  847),  scinden 
(OE.  scgndan,  1.  309)  beside  scenden  (1.  709),  (be)winden  (OE. 
w§ndan,  1.  310)  beside  bewenden  (1.  146),  meswinde  (cf.  OE. 
misw§nde,  adj.,  1. 480),  ellinde  (cf.  OE.  gl{e)l§nde,  1.  390)  beside 
elendech  (1.  441),  eovint  (11.  577,  746)  beside  covent  (11.  36, 
145,  1019). 

Note.  The  original  e  of  twinteeh  <  '^twentech  (OE.  twentig) 
is  not  a  mutated  a,  but  a  late  shortening  of  e  before  nt  (twen- 
<  tivegen).  i  is  never  found  in  the  conj.  ende  (OE.  §nd 
beside  and). 

19.  Influence  of  w.  w  -\-  short  front  vowel  became  u  between 
a  point  cons,  and  s : 

suster  (OS.  swester),  tusschen  ( <  Hwisschen), 

Long  Vowels 

20.  The  long  vowels  of  Primitive  Germanic  were  ^  (Goth,  e, 
WGmc.  a,  OWS.  ae,  Kt-Angl.  e),  e  (Goth,  e,  WGerm.  e,  OE.  e),  % 
6,  u.  The  vowels  of  early  Latin  loan-words  were  assimilated  to 
these  Gmc.  sounds,  Lt.  a  to  WGmc.  a,  e  in  open  syllables  to  e,  e 
to  t,  6  to  u  (MDu.  U) : 

strate  <  Lat.  (via)  strata,  brief  <  Lat.  hreve,  pine,  spise, 
side,  wile  <  Lat.  pena,  spesa  (<  spensa),  seda  (<  seta  <  saeta), 
velum,  ure  <  Lat.  {h)ora. 

21.  Of  these  Gmc.  vowels  ^  alone  has  preserved  its  original 
quality  in  MDu.  Gmc.  se  >  MDu.  a,  as  in  most  WGmc.  languages, 
corresponding  to  OE.  a  only  before  w  and  g  (the  voiced  back  open) 
+  back  vowel  (cf.  Wright,  0.  E.  G.,  §  120).  Gmc.  u  (OE.  u)  was 
fronted  throughout  to  u,  corresponding  to  OE.,  ME.  u,  or  to  its 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  11 

?-mutation  OE.  y,  ME.  I.  Gmc.  e  and  o  were  diphthongized  into 
td  and  U9  (cf.  §  7),  corresponding  to  OE.,  ME.  e  and  6  (or  its  i-muta- 
tion  e). 

Gmc.   96 :  laten   (OE.   Idefan),  saghen  (11.  174,  292,  OE. 

satvon),  laghen  (1.  851,  OE.  lagon),  saen  (OE.  sona,  with  6 

before  nasal ;  cf.  Wright,  O.E.G.,  §  121),  wanen  (OE.  wenan). 

Gmc.  e :  hier  (OE.  Mr),  sciere  (<  *sJceri-,  OHG.  scero),  die. 

Gmc.  ^:  lijf  (OE.  ^^/),  wijf  (OE.  ^<;^/'),  liden  (OE.  UMn). 

Gmc.  0 :  boec   (OE.  boc),   soeken   (OE.  secean),  grueten 

(1.  535,  cf.  §  8,  OE.  gretan),  soete,  suete  (1.  '140,  OE.  swete), 

Gmc.  u :  huns  (OE.  hus),  suur  (OE.  si'ir),  buten  (OE.  hutan), 
bruut  (OE.  hr^d),  luden  (OE.  hlydan),  suver  (OE.  sj(/re). 

Note,  ververen  (1.  257)  with  i-mutation  of  a  <  Gmc.  ^  is 
a  Brabantism. 

22.  Long  vowels  are  sometimes  reduced  in  quantity  before  con- 
sonant groups,  but  the  phonetic  process  is  often  crossed  by  cognate 
forms  with  the  original  long  vowel.  The  group  -cht  shortens 
throughout : 

ele  (OE.  Mc,  <  Gmc.  *ain-UJca-),  lichame  (OE.  Uc-hpma), 
(n)emme(e)r  (<  *eo-mer),  duchten  (if  related  to  Goth.  J>uhtus, 
'  conscience '),  gherochte  ( <  *garojfti,  a  derivate  of  '  roepen  \ 
OE.  hr&pan),  suchten  (OHG.  sUftmi),  ghi  wet  (§§  28,  99). 

Note.  No  shortening  has  taken  place  in  ghenuechte, 
because  the  cht  group  in  this  word  is  of  a  later  date  than  the 
shortening,  it  having  arisen  by  syncope  from  -nogiSa-  (OHG. 
ginuogida).  The  short  i  in  wit  (OE.  hwH)  has  not  been 
explained  satisfactorily. 

Diphthongs 

23.  The  Primitive  Germanic  diphthongs  were  ai  (OE.  a),  au 
(OE.  ea),  eu  (OE.  eo),  iu  (OE.  w,  OWS.  u).  Of  these  the  two  first 
were  smoothed  to  e  and  o,  and  eu  and  m  coalesced  in  ie.  The 
dialects  of  Limburg  and  Holland  kept  eu  and  iu  apart  as  ie  and  i1. 
e  <  Gmc.  ai  alternates  with  ei,  though  never  before  x  (ch),  w,  r, 
and  at  the  end  of  a  word,  in  which  positions  OLFr.  had  e  already. 
The  conditions  on  which  the  alternation  depends  are  not  clear. 
Closed  syllables  seem  to  favour  e,  open  ones  ei. 

Before  Gmc.  x,  u\  r,  and  final,  (ver)lenen  (OS.  lehnon  <  Gmc. 
Haix^n-),  see  (Goth,  saitvs),  eer  (Goth,  airis,  OE.  ^r),  keren 
(<  *7cair-  or  Jcai^-),  meer  (Goth,  maisa,  OE.  mard),  ere  (OE. 
ar),  wee  (OE.  tva),  twee  (OE.  ttva). 


12  BEATKIJS 

c  in  closed  syllables,  een  (OE.  an),  ghemeen  (OE.  gemxne), 
heet  (OE.  hat),  cleet  (OE.  claj^),  leet  (11.  45,  426,  497,  625, 
OE.  laj>)  beside  leit  (1.  666),  ordeel  (OE.  or-dal),  seel  (in 
clocseel,  OE.  sal),  vleesch(0E.^5esc),  ween  (cf.  OE.  tvdnian), 
ghesceet  (OE.  gescdd),  weet  (OE.  tvat). 

ei  in  open  syllables,  beide  (ME.  hgthe),  beiden  (OLFr.  heidan), 
deilen  (OE.  ddelan),  gheleide  (cf.  OE.  geldedan),  ghereide 
(OE.  gerad),  ghereiden  (OE.  gerdedan),  heylech  (OE.  halig), 
heymelike,  keyser(inne),  cleine  (11.  1,  1034,  OE.  cldene), 
beside  clene  (11.  55,  854),  leiden  (OE.  Idedan),  reyne  (Goth. 
hrains). 

e  in  open  syllables,  ghemene  (OE.  gemdene),  beten  (OE. 
haetan),  heten  (OE.  hdtan),  menen  (OE.  maenan),  sceden 
(OE.  sc{e)adan),  vrese  (OLFr.  freisa),  wese  (OLFr.  weiso), 
wenen  (OE.  tvanian). 

0  <  au.  bloot  (OE.  bleat),  boom  (OE.  Mam),  broot  (OE.  bread), 
doot  (OE.  deaj>),  doot  (OE.  dead),  doghen  (OE.  (ge)diegan), 
droghen  (with  o<au,  cf.  the  rhyme  drogheden -\- soghede, 
11.  491-2),  groot  (OE.  great),  hooft  (OE.  heafod),  hone  (cf. 
OE.  Man),  horen  (OE.  Jiieran,  Goth,  hausjan),  clooster  (Lat. 
daustrum),  copen  (OE.  ceapian),  loon  (OE.  lean),  loos  (OE. 
leas),  lopen  (OE.  hleapan),  noot  (OE.  nead),  ooe  (OE.  eac), 
oost  (OE.  east),  oot-  (OE.  ea/-),  oghe  (OE.  eage),  root  (OE. 
read),  soghen,  toghen  (Goth,  at-augjan),  troost  (ON.  traust). 

ie<eu,  bier  (OE.  beor),  bedrieghen,  dief  (OE. /eo/),  dienen 
(Gmc.  *J^eunon<  *J?etvanon,  cf.  OE.  J^eowian),  ghebieden 
(OE.  gebeodan),  cnielen  (OE.  cneowlian),  lief  (OE.  leof), 
lieghen  (OE.  leogan),  siec  (OE.  seoc),  verdriet  (cf.  OE. 
J>reotan),  verkiesen  (OE.  ceosan),  verliesen  (OE.  forleosan). 

ie<  iu.     diere  (OE.  deore,  dure),  liede  (OE.  Uode,  leode). 

Note  1.  Duvel  (11.  65,  704),  however,  has  u.  The  form 
dievel  is  rare  in  the  written  '  koine  '. 

Note  2.  lerst  (11.  95,  316,  710 ;  OE.  merest)  beside  eer 
(OE.  ^r)  may  be  due  to  a  Prim.  Gmc.  alternation  *%risto 
beside  "^airiz. 

24.  Heterosyllabic  e/i  —  o/a  gave  also  ie : 

sien<*se/iaw/,  ghescien  <  *-sZ;e/iaw,  tien  <^teulian,  twien 
<*twihan  (OE.  seon,  gesceon,  teon,  tiveon),  vrient < */n-owd 
(01^.  freond). 

The  ie  in  biecht  arose  from  %i-jeehtej  *jechte  being  a  derivative 
of  "^jehan  >  MDu.  ghien  =  '  to  confess '.  The  group  -ege-  was  con- 
tracted to  ei :  seget  >  seit. 

25.  New  diphthongs  arose  from  the  coalescence  of  vowels  with 
an  i'  or  w-glide  which  developed  before  a  ;  or  a  medial  w  (cf.  §  48). 


I 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  13 

The  long  diphthongs  ai,  oi,  oei,  au,  eu,  ieu  owe  their  origin  to 
this  process  : 

ttj  >  ctij,  spelt  ay,  aey  : 

sayen  (OE.  sawan),  mayen  (OE.  mctwan). 
6j  >  oijj  spelt  oy : 

hoy  (cf.  Goth.  gen.  sing,  haujis),  vervroyen  ( <  *frawjan), 
oej  >  oeij,  spelt  oei,  oy  : 

gloyen  (OE.  glowan). 

aW'  >  auw-f  spelt  au,  aeu : 

blau,  grau  (Gmc.  %lawa;  *grawa-,  from  the  inflected  forms, 
for  final  -tv  was  dropped  after  a  ;  cf.  §  48). 

ew-  >  euw-f  spelt  -ew- : 

ewe  (Gmc.  *aiwi^,  Goth.  aiwSy  OE.  ae). 
iew-  >  luw;  spelt  -iew : 

niewe  (OE.  mwe,  neowe,  OS.  niuwi). 

26.  From  what  is  stated  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  the  con- 
clusion is  obvious  that  the  MDu.  smoothing  of  the  Gmc.  diph- 
thongs au  and  eu  does  not  take  place  before  medial  w.  The 
groups  amv'  and  euw-  fell  together  in  MDu.  ouw-.  The  auw- 
group  includes  Gmc.  auw-f  aww-j  and  aw- : 

Gmc.  auw- :  (aen)scouwen  (Gmc.  *sJcauw6jan,  OE.  sceawian). 
Gmc.  aw- :  gou  (Goth,  gawi),  hou  (Goth,  hawif  hoy  being  the 

regular  form  of  the  oblique  cases,  Goth,  haujis ;  cf.  §  25), 

vroude  (OHG.  frawida). 
Gmc.  aww- :  dou  (Gmc.  *ffawwa-,  OE.  deaw). 
Gmc.  euw- :  rouwe  (OE.  hreow),  rouwen  (OE.  hreowan),  ghe- 
trouwe  (OE.  getreowe). 

Note.  Vrouwe  is  probably  a  loan-word  from  OHG. 
vrouwe.  The  corresponding  MDu.  form  would  be  *vroye< 
Gmc.  *fraujon-. 

Vowels  in  Weak  Syllables 

27.  In  the  inflexional  endings  no  trace  is  left  of  the  original 
Gmc.  variety  of  vocalism,  all  vowels  having  been  weakened  to  9 


14  BEATEIJS 

(spelt  e).     In  a  great  many  cases  d  disappears  altogether.      It  is 
dropped  throughout  after  vowels,  except  I  and  ei  : 

vaen  <  *m-aw  <  *va-}i9n,  slaen  <  *sla{h)9n, 
lien,  vrie  (1.  535),  vrien,  Marie  (1.  536). 

28.  Syncope  of  9  between  conss.  might  take  place  both  before 
and  after  the  stress,  when  the  cons,  group  that  arose  could 
be  pronounced  without  difficulty.  Strict  rules  cannot  be  given, 
as  forms  with  and  without  syncope  occur  side  by  side  in  the 
same  texts  : 

Before  the  stress :  tsamen  (1.  408)  beside  tesamen  (1.  259), 

bliven  (OE.  helifan)  beside  beladen,  beletten,  belegghen, 

maer  <  *nwaer  <  neivaer. 
After  the  stress:  naect  (OE.  nacod),  hi  maect,  hooft  (OE. 

Jieafod),  abt  (OE.  abbod),  beside  doghet,  gheelaghet,  onver- 

saghet,  ghedaghet. 

The  tendency  to  syncope  is  strongest  where  9  stands  between 
s  and  s,  between  two  point  stops,  and  between  a  point  stop  and  s  : 

oii8<*onses  (the  only  possible  form  of  the  g.s.  masco  and 
ntr.  of  the  poss.  pronoun),  onghetroost  <  onghetroostet,  quet  < 
queddet,  ghereide  (1.  S5)  <  ghereidde  <  ghereidede,  ghi  wont  < 
ivoudet  (§  107),  ghi  wet <tvetet  (cf.  §§  22,  99),  hi  vsmt <vant  9t 
(et),  tfelt,  tfensterkijn,  &c.  (in  which  t<d9t<dat),  hadsi 
(1.  913)  <haddesi,h.et8<het  es,  savons,  sanders,  smenschen, 
&c.  (in  which  s<d9S<des). 

Note.  Even  ons  es  in  1.  821 :  den  here  die  ons[es]broe- 
der  was  treated  in  the  same  way  as  onses  and  became  ons. 

29.  9  before  a  stressed  vowel,  and  initial  9,  are  dropped  : 

boven  <  *bd-oven  (OS.  bi-odan),  buten  (OS.  b{i)utan),  dabyt, 
dorloy,  &c.  (in  which  d-  <  d9  (de)),  tavont,  teenen,  teren, 
torconden,  &c.  (in  which  t-  <  te). 

neYeii<*9neven  (OE.  onefn),  weQh<ewech<enwech  (OE. 

omveg), 

30.  Of  two  consecutive  syllables  with  9,  one  may  be  eliminated 
when  the  surrounding  consonants  facilitate  the  syncope.  The 
first  9  is  dropped  before  point  conss.,  as  in  the  superlative  suffix 
-€ste>-ste,  and  in  the  preterite  of  the  weak  conjugation  -ede>'de. 
The  9  of  the  preposition  te  when  followed  by  the  definite  article  is 
also  dropped  and  the  initial  d-  of  the  article  assimilated  to  the  t  of 
the  preposition,  te  des,  te  den  becoming  tes,  ten.     Syncope  of  the 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  15 

second  d  takes  place  in  the  ending  -enen,  as  in  metten  (1.  849) 
beside  mettenen  (1.  195).  An  agglomeration  of  three  or  more  weak 
syllables  is  lightened  by  the  syncope  of  the  second  of  these 
syllables  : 

cussese  (1.  284)  <  cussedese,  vorese  (1.  1026)  <  voredese,  noe- 
mesise  (1.  618)  <  noemedesise,  becorese  <  hecoredese  (1.  929). 

31.  Final  9  is  not  dropped  after  a  stress  syllable.  In  the  di- 
syllabic endings  -ere,  -ele,  -ene,  -eme  the  final  s  disappears,  as 
a  rule  :  ten  clooster  (1.  96)  beside  ten  cloostere  (1.  186),  die  slotel 
(1.  248)  beside  die  slotele  (1.  237),  die  bitter  doot  (1.  312).  In 
words  with  weak  sentence  stress,  final  d  was  often  not  sounded, 
which  gave  rise  to  doublets  such  as — 

ane — an,  ave — af,  dore — dor,  mede — met,  neware — 
newaer  (>m8er),  omme — om,  onse — ons,  tote — tot,  ute — 
uut,  vore — vor. 

32.  No  weakening  of  the  vowel  sound  takes  place — 

(1)  In  the  syllable  before  the  stress  of  French  loan-words 
(ef.  §  6). 

(2)  In  a  great  many  native  suffixes,  whose  secondary  stress  was 
sufficiently  strong  to  prevent  the  reduction  of  their  vowel 
sound  to  d  : 

-are  (beside  -ere,  -er),  -doom,  -ers(s)e,  -heit  (-hede),  -ich 
(beside  -eeh,  which  prevails  in  our  text),  -i(g)ghe  (beside 
-e(g)ghe,  cf.  dieveghe,  1.  708),  -ijn  (beside  -en,  cf.  selverijn, 

I.  323,  ijseren,  1. 102),  -inghe,  -inc,  -inne,  -kijn,  -kine,  -lijc 
(-lie),  -lijn,  -line,  -loos,  -nede,  -nesse,  -sam,  -scap. 

(3)  In  the  words  avont,  viant,  armoede,  ambocht,  outaer, 
lichame. 

All  the  syllables  mentioned  under  (2)  and  (3)  may  be  used  as 
rhymes,  in  which  case  the  words  are  to  be  read  with  level  stress  : 

11.  931-2  bringhen  +  be-dinghen,  11.    305-6  formi-ne-f 
gu'ldine. 
11.  25-6  dochte  +  a'mbochte,   11.  233-4  daer  +  outaer, 

II.  205-6  name  +  lichame. 

Note.  In  niewer  <nie-toaer  the  weakening  of  the  vowel 
sound  is  due  to  the  word  being  no  longer  felt  as  a  compound. 
Men  (pron.  mdn)  <  man  through  lack  of  accent. 

33.  New  weak  syllables  arose  by  the  development  of  a  svara- 
bhakti  vowel  between  a  liquid  and  another  cons . : 

toren  (OE.  torn),  appel  (Gmc.  *apla-),  bitter  (Gmc.  *bitra-). 


16  BEATKIJS 

Between  a  cons,  and  w  an  ii  developed  : 

weduwe  (OE.  tvid{e)we),  vervaluen  (cf.  OE.  fealw-  in  the 
inflected  forms). 

CONSONANTS 
34.  Primitive  Germanic  contained  the  following  consonants : 


Lip. 

Point. 

Front  and  back 

Voiceless  stops 

P 

t 

h 

Voiceless  open  cons. 

f 

ps 

X 

Voiced               ,, 

d 

dz 

9 

Nasals 

m 

n 

y 

Liquids 

Ir 

Semi-vowels 

IV 

J 

35.  Middle  Dutch  shares  the  following  changes  with  the  other 
WGmc.  dialects : 

(1)  5>&  initially,  after  the  lip  nasal,  and  in  the  gemination  ; 
otherwise  it  remained  an  open  cons. 

(2)  3^>d  in  all  positions. 

(3)  Medial  z>r;  final  z  was  dropped. 

(4)  All  conss.  except  r  were  doubled  by  a  following  j  after  short 
accented  vowels,  and  the  voiceless  stops,  p,  f,  Jc,  were  doubled 
under  the  same  conditions  before  a  liquid. 

Note.  The  double  spelling  of  conss.  in  MDu.  orthography 
does  not  always  indicate  original  length  of  the  cons.  It  often 
serves  as  a  means  of  indicating  shortness  of  the  preceding 
vowel,  as  in  allene  <  al-ene,  and  in  sullen  (OLFr.  sulan),  with 
the  short  vowel  of  the  singular  of  the  pres.  subj.,  which  was 
extended  to  all  the  forms  of  the  present  tense  (§  13).  This 
use  of  the  double  cons,  must  be  due  to  the  loss  of  the  old 
distinction  between  short  and  long  conss.  between  two  vowels. 
Long  conss.  were  also  reduced  in  quantity  at  the  end  of  a 
word. 

Middle  Dutch  Consonant  Changes 

36.  Unvoicing  of  Voiced  Consonants.  All  voiced  conss.  were 
unvoiced  at  the  end  of  a  syllable.  The  spelling  reflects  the 
change  very  accurately.  The  word  God,  however,  never  appears 
with  4.  In  subtijl  the  b  (=  p)  is  spelt  in  accordance  with 
the  French  original.  The  stem-syllables  of  weak  verbs  whose 
infinitive  ends  in  -den,  'hhen  (§  35,  i),  -gen,  -sen  (=  sen),  -ven  retain 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  17 

their  voiced  conss.  when,  in  consequence  of  the  syncope  oi-edode, 
these  conss.  came  to  close  the  syllable  : 

send.Q<send-de  (1.  82),  diXitw or 6.0  <antword-de  (1.  119), 
prijsden  (pron.  -zden,  1.  174),  gheloofde  (pron.  -vde,  1.  159). 

Note  1.  The  frequent  alternation  of  medial  -d-  and  final  -t, 
as  in  hand-  and  hant,  vriend-  and  vrient,  gave  rise  to  such 
erroneous  forms  as  covende  (1.  1019),  being  the  dat.  sing,  of 
covent,  the  final  -t  of  which  is  original. 

Note  2.  Final  4<-d  in  the  2nd  pers.  pi.  pres.  ind.  (§82) 
appears  as  -d  before  enclitic  •i<Gmc.  *jiz  (§  71). 

Stops 

37.  Voiceless  Stops.  The  voiceless  stops  of  Prim.  Gmc.  remained 
the  same  in  MDu.  in  nearly  all  positions.  In  the  group  sk,  however, 
1c  was  changed  to  the  corresponding  open  sound  in  the  '  Anlaut '  of 
strong  syllables.  Final,  and  probably  also  medial  sJoss,  although 
sc  (or  sch)  is  retained  in  the  spelling. 

erdsche  (1.  390)  pron.  ertse,  mensche  (1.  66)  pron.  mense, 

38.  Assimilation  of  h  and  ^  to  a  following  n  and  of  i?  to  a 
following  m  took  place  in  in  <  ikn  <  ic  en,  hen  <  hetn  <  het  en,  coman 
<coqpman.  t(d)  is  also  assimilated  to  a  following  I  in  qualijc< 
quaetlijc.  t  is  dropped  in  the  groups  nts,  fts,  and  clits:  savons< 
savonts  (1.  562),  vinatvL  <vintstu  (1.  681),  h.eGfai8e<Jieeftsise(l.  731), 
heefse  (1.  884),  snachs  <  snaclits  (1.  620).  Nach  for  nacht  in  the 
formula  nach  ende  dach  (1.  228)  is  of  course  due  to  the  rhyme 
with  dach. 

Note.  Initial  Jc  is  spelt  k  before  e  and  i,  and  c  before  conss. 
and  other  vowels.  Double  Jc  is  always  spelt  ck,  which  is  also 
used  sometimes  for  medial  k  after  a  liquid  or  nasal,  as  in 
drincken  (1.  897). 

In  the  Fr.  loan-word  pretioos,  t  stands  for  ts. 

39.  Voiced  Stops.     The  voiced  stops  of  MDu.  were : 
&<Prim.  Gmc.  t,  initially,  after  m,  and  in  the  gemination,  as 

in  hebben  ( <  *x«^j«*«). 

c?<Prim.  Gmc.  ^in  all  positions. 

g,  exclusively  after  the  back  nasal. 

A  new  d  arose  in  MDu.  by  the  development  of  a  glide  between 
I,  n,  r,  and  a  following  r  (of.  §  64). 

kelder  (<Lat.  cellarium),  minder  (Goth,  minnisa),  scoonder 
( <  scoonre,  1.  192),  swaerder  (compar.  of  swaer). 

1466-S  C 


18  BEATEIJS 

40.  The  group  mh  was  assimilated  to  mm,  and  the  long  conso- 
nant subsequently  reduced  in  quantity,  as  in  omme  (OE.  ymbe). 
The  group  yg,  which  in  Mod.Du.  has  become  ^,  had  not  yet 
advanced  so  far  in  MDu.  in  all  positions.  The  assimilating 
process  had  evidently  affected  the  group  in  the  middle  of  a  word 
between  vowels,  but  the  frequent  spelling  of  final  -ng  as  -nc  and 
of  -ngs  as  -nx  seems  to  prove  retention  of  the  stop  in  MDu. : 

dine,  lane,  ioncfrouwe,  vinken  (<vinc  en,  1.  938),  lanx, 
anxt  (<OLFr. 


-nd,  on  the  other  hand,  remained  the  same,  except  that  in  final 
position  the  d  lost  its  voice.  Assimilation  of  the  initial  d  of  the 
definite  article  to  the  final  t  and  p  of  prepositions  is  very  frequent : 

uter  <  uut  der,  opten  <  op  den. 

Open  Consonants 
41.   Voiceless  Spirants.     Gmc.  x  had,  as  in  all  Gmc.  languages, 
been  weakened  to  a  mere  breath  initially,  and  was  dropped  in  MDu. 
before  I,  r,  n,  w,  medially  between  vowels,  and  between  a  vowel 
and  a  liquid,  and  finally  after  a  long-stress  vowel  : 

Initial  h :  laehen  (OE.  hliehhan),  lopen  (OE.  Meapan),  luden 
(OE.  hl^dan) ;  reyne  (Goth,  hrains),  roepen  (OE.  hropan), 
rouwe  (OE.  hreow) ;  nighen  (OE.  hnlgan) ;  waer  (OE. 
hwder),  weder  (OE.  Jiwdeper),  werf  (OE.  hwearf),  wile  (OE. 
hwll),  wit  (OE.  JiwU). 

Medial  h :  sien  (OS.  sehan),  tien  (Goth,  tiuhan),  slaen  (Goth. 
slaJian) ;  (be)velen  (Goth.  filJian,  OE.  feolan). 

Final  h :  seoe  (OE.  scoJi),  na  (OE.  ne(a)h). 

Initial  h  was  also  lost  in  secondary  syllables  of  compounds,  as 
in  Godaat  <  Gods  hat  (1.  354),  haeatechede  <haestech-hede.  After 
final  X  (spelt  ch)  initial  h  disappears  even  in  stress  syllables : 
gheweldechere  Kgheweldech  here  (1.  703).  But  in  liehame  (pron. 
li'xamd)  Gmc.  "kx  had  become  x>  probably  before  the  weakening  of 
X  to  a  breath.  In  hoe  (Gmc.  *x«^o)  the  w  was  dropped  before  the 
rounded  back  vowel  previous  to  the  general  weakening  of  initial 
h  before  w.  The  grou  -cht,  though  otherwise  preserved,  became 
't  in  (Ta)iet <(n)eo-wiht,  owing  to  the  unaccented  position  of  the 
word  in  the  sentence ;  OLFr.  has  already  niewet  beside  niewiht. 
Gmc.  -xs  became  MDu.  -ss  (OE.  -x). 

ses  (OE.  siex),  vos  (OE.  fox),  wassen  (OE.  iveaxan). 

Note  1.     As  Gmc.  intervocalic  x  had  disappeared  in  MDu.,^ 


^ 


GKAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  19 

ch  was  never  doubled  in  the  spelling,  as  it  could  stand  only 
for  the  geminated  x  of  WGmc,  as  in  lachen  (OE.  hliehhan). 

Note  2.  In  hoven  (1.  626)  the  poem  offers  an  isolated 
instance  of  the  false  insertion  of  h.  Or  it  may  be  a  scribal 
error,  a  case  of  dittography  (cf.  note  to  1.  20). 

42.  Of  the  three  remaining  voiceless  open  conss.  of  the  parent 
language,  /  was  voiced  in  MDu.  initially  and  medially,  s  initially 
before  w  and  vowels  and  medially  between  vowels,  and  between 
a  liquid  or  nasal  and  a  vowel,  and  /  became  d  in  all  positions. 
Gmc.  /  and  ^  had,  accordingly,  coalesced  in  MDu.  (cf.  §  35  (2) ), 
giving  rise  to  homonyms  such  as  doot,  1.  312  (OE.  deaj>),  and  doot, 
11.  219,  423,  936  (OE.  dead).  The  voicing  of  s  does  not  find  its 
expression  in  the  spelling  ;  only  a  few  cases  occur  in  our  text 
where  i8  is  spelt  instead  of  s : 

zeder,  1.  430;  zee,  1.  660;  zide,  1.  850;  ziele,  1.  388; 
zondersse,  1.  762  ;  zwaer,  1.  844. 

Voiceless  s  was,  between  vowels,  differentiated  from  0  by  being 
written  double,  as  in  verloossen  (1.  524),  but  in  couse  (1.  277)  the 
voicelessness  of  the  s  is  left  unindicated  (<Med.  Lat.  calcia  or 
NFr.  cauce).  But  MDu.  had  no  means  of  distinguishing  initial 
s  from  ^,  as  the  latter  symbol  was  seldom  used.  In  onversaghet 
(1.  227)  the  s  is  voiceless,  being  assimilated  from  f5<MHG.  0 
{verzagen).  French  loan-words  also  retained  their  voiceless  /  and  5, 
as  the  MDu.  voicing  had  come  to  a  stop  before  they  were  adopted  : 

cruee,  cesseren,  feest,  fel,  fijn,  fonteyne,  foreest,  formijn. 

Note,  v  and  z  lose  their  voice  initially  after  the  prefix 
ont-  and  the  aphetized  form  of  the  neuter  definite  article: 
ontfaen  (1.  143),  tfensterkijn  (1.  97),  tfelt  (1.  449). 

^  (§  45)  loses  its  voice  under  the  same  conditions,  but  the 
change  is  not  reflected  in  the  spelling :  ontgaen  (1.  63). 

43.  Grammatical  Change.  The  Gmc.  alternation  of  voiceless 
and  voiced  open  conss.,  known  by  the  name  of  grammatical 
change,  is  entirely  effaced  in  MDu.  in  the  case  of  Gmc. /— ^  and 
/— ^,  medial  /  having  coalesced  with  5  and  final  5  with  /,  and 
J>  and  ^  having  both  become  d  (or  t,  when  final).  The  Gmc. 
alternation  of  5  and  z  survives  in  MDu.  z—r,  occurring  in  a  few- 
verbal  forms : 

verkiesen — p.p.  vercoren(l.  377),  verliesen— p.p.  verloren 
(1.  957). 

c2 


20  BEATRIJS 

That  between  Gmc.  x  ^^^  7  i^  hardly  perceptible  in  MDu., 
owing  to  the  loss  of  intervocalic  h  <  Gmc.  x  • 

tien,  pret.  tooeh  (11.  233,  776),  p.p.  ghetoghen  (1.  118). 

44.  The  group  -ft  became  -cht,  which  subsequently  shortened 
preceding  long  vowels  (cf.  §  22).  The  change  was  sometimes 
counteracted  by  the  influence  of  cognate  forms  with  original 
/  (v),  as  in  ghifte  {gheven),  ofte  (of).  In  gheeft  (1.  56)  and 
similar  forms  of  the  3rd  pers.  pres.  ind.  the  -ft  arose  from  -vet  by 
syncope,  subsequent  to  the  change  of  -ft  >  -cht. 

achter  (OE.  defter),  gherochte  (<  Gmc.  *girdfti),  cracht 
(OE.  crdeft),  suchten  (OHGr.  sufteon ;  cf.  OE.  seofian),  soehte 
(OE.  softe), 

45.  Voiced  Spirants.  The  only  Gmc.  voiced  spirant  that  remained 
an  open  cons,  in  all  positions  but  one  (cf.  §  39)  was  y,  spelt  gh 
before  e  and  i,  and  g  before  conss.  and  other  vowels.  The  gh  in 
the  inflected  forms  of  hooch,  as  in  hooghelike  (1.  685),  is  not 
original,  Gmc.  having  x  i^  ^^  cases.  The  voiced  sound  was 
introduced  on  the  analogy  of  words  in  which  Gmc.  medial  g 
alternated  with  final  ch,  as  in  laech  beside  laghe  '  low '. 

MDu.  g  >  j  through  dissimilation  in  jeghen  (OS.  gegin). 

Gmc.  5  had  remained  a  voiced  open  cons,  between  vowels  and 
between  a  liquid  and  vowel,  and  had  lost  its  voice  in  final 
position  and  before  s  and  t : 

du  heves  (1.  673)  beside  heefsise  (1.  731),  hovet  beside 
hooft. 

Note.  Hoot,  with  loss  of  v  before  d  as  in  ME.,  is  a 
Brabantism. 

Nasals 

46.  m  and  n  remained  intact  in  nearly  all  positions.  Final  -m  of 
inflexional  endings  became  -n,  except  in  the  monosyllabic  pro- 
noun hem  and  in  the  1st  pers.  pres.  ind.  (ic)  bem  beside  ben. 
Occasional  spellings  such  as  reine  (1.  814),  save  (1.  456),  hebbe 
(1.  924),  seem  to  point  to  an  early  tendency  to  drop  the  final  -n  of 
weak  syllables ;  cf.  also  the  rhymes  drogheden  +  soghede  (11.491-2), 
kinde  +  sinden  (11.  747-8),  gherochte  +  mochte[n]  (11.  923-4). 

Loss  of  m  took  place  before  the  voiceless  lip  open  in  vijf  (Goth. 
fimf)  and  soehte  ( <  samft,  cf.  §  43),  an  exact  parallel  of  the  Primitive 
Gmc.  loss  of  ff  and  subsequent  compensatory  lengthening  of  the 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  21 

preceding  vowel  before  x-  It  may  be  that  the  loss  of  the  n  in 
doghet  (OHO.  tugund,  Gmc.  "^dugunpi-)  is  also  due  to  the  voiceless 
spirant  that  originally  followed  (OE.  diAgup). 

n  was  assimilated  to  a  following  r  in  weak  syllables : 

ere<eewre,  ghevoKgheenre,  m.ieT{e)<mijnre. 

An  isolated  case  of  assimilation  of  w  to  a  preceding  r  (a  Bra- 
bantism)  is  found  in  berren  (1.  837)  <  hernen  (OE.  Idernan), 

The  assimilation  of  mn  >  mm  in  stemme  (OE.  stemn)  is  already 
OLFr.  Change  of  the  point  nasal  into  the  lip  nasal  by  a  following 
to  occurs  in  maer  <  n(e)waer.  The  final  -n  of  doen,  originally 
doe  (cf.  OE.  pa),  is  due  to  the  analogy  of  other  pronominal  adverbs 
such  as  dan  (OE.  pgyine).  An  intrusive  -rtr  occurs  in  visenteren 
(1.  920),  which  may  be  compared  to  vulgar  English  milintary. 
The  n  in  mordenare  (1.  654)  <  morderare  is  due  to  dissimilation. 

Liquids 

47.  I  was  not  subject  to  any  changes  except  in  the  groups  aid, 
alt,  old,  olt  (cf.  §  17j.  Neither  was  r  changed  (a  point  or  uvular 
trill),  except  that  it  often  shifted  its  position  when  it  stood  before 
a  short  vowel  followed  by  a  point  cons. : 

derde  (OE.  pridda),  torsen  (OFr.  trosser),  berren  <&emm 
<  hrennen. 

The  opposite  change  took  place  where  r  stood  between  a  short 
vowel  and  the  group  -cht :  G-hijsbrecht  (OE.  Gislbeorht ;  cf.  Searle, 
Onomasticon  Anglo-saxonicum,  p.  258). 

A  similar  phenomenon  is  the  treatment  of  enclitic  sonant  r, 
being  the  reduced  form  of  ere  (OS.,  OHG.  iro,  OE.  Jiiera)  and  of 
daer.  This  r  appears  either  as  -er  or  as  -re ;  the  latter  especially 
after  vowels  and  liquids : 

comter  (1.  40),  hebter  (1.  266),  diere  (11.  581,  607),  hire 
(1.  740),  wilre  (1.  721). 

Semi-vowels 

48.  w  (a  lip-teeth  initially,  bilabial  in  other  positions)  was 
dropped  between  ^  and  a  rounded  back  vowel  (cf.  §  41,  hoe<  *x^o): 

so(o)  (OE.  swd)j  soete  (OE.  swot-). 

Final  tv  became  u  after  a  short  vowel,  with  which  it  formed 


22  BEATKIJS 

a  diphthong.    After  long  vowels  final  w  was  dropped,  and  after 
conss.  it  survived  as  -a  (spelt  -e) : 

cnie  <  ^hneu  (cf.  §  23)  <  Gmc.  *lcnetva-,  stro  <  *strau  (cf.  §  23) 
<Gmc.  *strawa;  see<*sai  (cf.  §  23)  <  Gmc.  *saim-,  gele< 
Gmc.  *gelwa-  (OE.  geolo). 

Initial  j  followed  by  e  or  i  became  g.  (spelt  gh) : 

ghi<*ji^,  ghene,  ghinder  (cf.  OE.  geondj  Goth,  jains). 

The  opposite  change  of  ^  >  j  is  due  to  dissimilation  (§  45) : 
jeghen  (OLFr.  gegin). 

ACCIDENCE 

NOUNS 

49.  The  original  variety  of  declensions  which  the  parent  lan- 
guage had  inherited  from  Indo-Germanic  was  in  MDu.  levelled  to 
two  main  classes,  usually  called  the  strong  and  the  weak  declen- 
sion. The  former  includes  the  original  vocalic  stems  with  the 
exclusion  of  the  feminine  6-  and  Jo-stems,  and  the  consonant  stems 
with  the  exception  of  the  w-stems.  The  weak  class  includes  the 
0-,  jo;  and  w-stems. 

The  Strong  Declension 

50.  The  inflexional  endings  of  the  strong  declension  are  alike 
for  the  three  genders,  the  only  exception  being  the  gen.  sing., 
which  ends  in  -es  inmasc.  and  ntr.  nouns,  and  in  -e  in  fern,  nouns. 
These  endings  are : 

Sing.  Plur. 
Nom.  Ace.                    —  -e 

Gen.  m.n.     -{e)s,  f.  -(e)  -e 

Dat.  -(e)  -en 

dach  (1.  67),  daghes  (11.  166,  925),  daghe  (1.  32),  daghe 
(1.  536),  daghen  (1.  122). 

Words  whose  n.s.  ended  in  -e  have  the  same  form  in  all  cases 
except  in  the  g.s.  and  the  d.p.  This  was  the  case  with  original 
;a«stems  such  as  sondare,  bedde,  &c.,  and  with  original  i-  and 
w-stems  whose   stem-syllable   was  short,    such   as  bake,   sone. 


GKAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  28 

After  a  long  syllable  -i  and  •w(o)  had  disappeared  before  the  MDu. 
period,  just  as  in  OE.  (cf.  Wright,  0.  E.  G.,  §  215). 

Note.  Beside  regular  stede  (OE.  st^de)  MDu.  has  also  stat 
with  early  loss  of  the  i-suffix  on  the  analogy  of  fern,  i-stems 
with  long  stem-syllable.  The  latter  form,  originally  due  to 
the  n.a.s.,  was  also  extended  to  the  g.d.s. :  d.s.  stat  (11.  164, 
449),  d.s.  stede  (11.  183,  226),  a.s.  stat  (1.  166),  a.s.  stede 
(1.  839).  The  d.s.  steden  (1.  557)  owes  its  -en  to  the  influence 
of  the  weak  declension  (cf.  §  55). 

51.  The  regularity  of  this  inflexional  system  is  often  disturbed 
by  the  MDu.  syncope  (cf.  §  27  ff.).  The  g.s.  -es  is  always  reduced  to 
-s  after  a  weak  end-syllable,  as  in  savons  (1.  562),  and  also  after 
words  in  -s,  -s(ch)  (cf.  §  28).  The  g.s.  G-ods  (1.  750)  is  not  due  to 
syncope,  as  in  that  case  the  vowel  would  be  long  (cf.  §  10).  It  is 
a  new  formation,  the  reduced  genitive  ending  -s  being  afiixed  to 
the  form  of  the  nominative.  The  dative  G<^e  is  extended  to  the 
accusative  (cf.  11.  389,  492).  Nouns  whose  nominative  ends  in 
a  consonant  often  have  a  dative  without  -e.  The  same  applies  to 
the  g.s.f.  which  appears  more  frequently  without  than  with  -e. 

uten  huus  (1.  742),  ter  weduwen  huus  (1.  844),  enegher 
bruut  (1.  180). 

52.  Neuter  nouns  of  one  long  syllable  have  a  n.a.p.  without  any 
ending,  a  survival  of  the  OLFr.  forms,  whose  final  -o  had  dis- 
appeared after  long  syllables  (cf.  §  50).  Forms  in  -e,  however, 
are  equally  frequent,  except  after  numerals  : 

twee  paer  (1.  271),  XII.  iaer  (1.  92),  .V.cpont  (1.  181),  die 
selve  woort  (1.  546),  beside  .M.  iare  (1.  374). 

The  plurals  man  (11.  370,  1028)  and  voet  are  the  regular  forms 
of  the  original  consonantal  inflexion. 

53.  A  group  of  neuter  monosyllables  form  their  plural  in  -er(e), 
a  survival  of  the  Germanic  stems  in  -a^,  -iz  (cf.  Wright,  0.  E.  G., 
§  419).  These  words  are  ey  (OE.  aeg),  hoen  '  fowl  %  runt  (rint) 
'neat'  (OE.  hrmr),  loof  'leaf  (OE.  Uaf),  been  'bone'  (OE.  lan\ 
bert  '  board ',  blat '  leaf  (OE.  llded),  calf  (OE.  cealf),  kint  '  child ', 
cleet  (OE.  claj>),  lam  (OE.  Igmb),  rat  '  wheel '.  The  first  three 
have  always  -er(e),  the  others  form  their  plural  also  in  -e  : 

n.a.p.  kindere  (11.  478,  868),  kinder  (11.  408,  432,  453), 
d.p.  kinderen  (1.  585),  kinden  (11.  573,  877). 


24  BEATRIJS  . 

Note.  Diminutives  of  these  neuter  nouns  form  their  plural 
from  the  original  stem  in  -r:  kindekijn,  pi.  kinderkine 
(L  567). 

54.  The  nouns  of  relationship  in  -r,  vader,  breeder,  moeder, 
suster,  dochter  are  invariable  in  the  sg.  and  in  the  n.a.p.  The 
g.p.  ends  in  -(e)re,  the  d.p.  in  -(e)ren.  These  forms  are  normally 
developed  from  the  Prim.  Gmc.  forms  and  are  identical  with 
those  in  OE.  :  stveostor,  e.  g.,  is  the  normal  form  of  the  whole  of 
the  sg.  and  of  the  n.a.p.,  whereas  the  g.p.  sweostra,  d.p.  sweostrum, 
correspond  to  the  MDu.  endings  (-e)re,  {-e)ren.  But  just  as  in  OE. 
the  original  g.s.  and  n.p.  '^fdeder  became  fded{e)res,  fded(e)ras  on 
analogy  with  the  a-stems,  so  in  MDu.  a  new  g.s.  in  -ers  and  a  n.a.p. 
in  -(e)re  were  formed  of  vader  and  breeder,  in  accordance  with  the 
regular  forms  of  the  strong  inflexion.  The  three  feminine  stems 
in  -r  form  a  new  n.a.p.  in  -(e)reii,  with  -en  from  the  weak  inflexion. 

The  Weak  Declension 

55.  The  weak  declension  had  lost  its  original  Gmc.  endings 
throughout,  so  that  the  n,  which  was  originally  inseparable  from 
the  stem,  came  to  be  felt  as  an  inflexional  ending.  The  regular 
endings  in  MDu.  are  : 

Sing.  Plur. 
Nom.  Ace.     -e  -en 

Gen.     -en  -en 

Dat.     -e{n)  -en 

The  dative,  originally  ending  in  -en,  was  usually  assimilated  to 
the  accusative  singular.  The  final  -e  of  the  n.a.d.s.  disappears  in 
such  words  as  jonglier(e)  (cf.  §  31),  which  caused  them  to  be 
looked  upon  as  strong  stems  and  to  be  inflected  accordingly 
(pi.  ionghere,  1.  439). 

56.  The  fusion  of  the  Gmc.  o-  and  jo-stems  with  the  weak 
declension  was  brought  about  by  the  similarity  of  most  of  their 
inflexional  endings.  Their  organic  endings  would  have  been  -e 
for  the  whole  of  the  sg.  and  for  the  n.a.p.,  and  -en  for  the  g.d.p. 
(OLFr.  g.p.  -ono,  -ano,  -eno,  d.p.  -on,  -un).  The  insufficient  distinc- 
tion betw^een  sg.  and  pi.  led  to  the  extension  of  the  form  in  -en  of 
the  g.d.p.  to  the  n.a.p.,  whereby  the  plural  coalesced  with  the 
plural  of  the  weak  stems.  The  form  of  the  g.s.  had  been  assimi- 
lated to  that  of  the  weak  class  already  in  the  OLFr.  period. 


GEAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  25 

57.  The  ending  -en  proved  such  a  useful  distinctive  form  of  the 
plural,  that  it  was  finally  assumed  also  by  the  strong  declension, 
first  of  all  by  words  ending  in  an  accented  vowel,  which  have 
invariably  -w,  such  as  scoe,  pi.  scoen  (11.  235,  278,  513,  683,  880). 
Another  plural  suffix  was  found  in  -s,  which  was  borrowed  from 
OFr.  and  affixed  to  words  in  -er  from  -ere  (Goth,  -areis),  from 
which  it  was  extended  to  words  in  -er  of  different  origin,  such  as 
keiser  '  emperor ',  clooster  (pi.  cloosters,  1.  610). 

Note.  The  -n  of  scoen,  however,  proved  insufficient  to 
mark  the  word  as  a  plural  form,  as  -e,  -en,  and  -s  were  the 
usual  distinctives  of  the  plural  number.  The  sg.  scoe  being 
naturally  of  rare  occurrence,  the  plural  scoen,  which  lacked 
the  characteristics  of  the  plural,  began  to  be  used  in  its  stead, 
until  in  Mod.Du.  it  supplanted  scoe  altogether.  From  this 
new  sg.  scoen  a  new  plural  scoene  was  formed  (1.  806)  with 
the  regular  ending  of  the  strong  declension. 

Gender 

58.  As  the  weak  class  contained  a  large  majority  of  feminine 
nouns,  owing  to  its  fusion  with  the  o-  and  jo-stems,  the  weak  -e 
came  to  be  looked  upon  as  an  especially  feminine  ending,  so  that 
masc.  and  ntr.  nouns  in  -e  easily  assumed  a  feminine  gender  : 

sede  m.f.,  orconde  m.f.,  herte  n.f.,  oghe  n.f.,  ore  n.f. 

The  suffixes  -heide  <  *-hai9)a-  (ntr.),  and  -heide  <  *-hai3fz'  (fem.), 
became  mixed  and  gave  rise  to  a  general  fluctuation  in  the  gender 
of  these  words.  Nouns  in  -nesse  are  either  fem.  or  neuter,  as  in 
this  suffix  Germanic  -nassja-  (ntr.)  and  -nassjo-  (f.)  have  coalesced  : 

na  der  waerheide  (1.  13),  al  dat  scoonheide  (1.  184). 

59.  Words  that  did  not  end  in  -e  were,  as  a  natural  consequence, 
felt  to  be  masculine.  They  could  not  so  easily  be  mistaken  for 
neuter  nouns,  as  these  were  always  distinguishable  by  the  forms 
of  the  definite  article  and  the  demonstrative  pronoun  in  the  nom. 
and  ace.  sg.,  whereas  the  n.s.  of  the  masc.  and  fem.  article  and 
pronoun  were  identical.  A  very  rare  instance  of  the  transition 
from  the  masc.  to  neuter  gender  is  afforded  by  the  word  lichame 
m.n.  (OE.  Uchama  m.),  for  which  the  gender  of  its  synonym  lijf  is 
probably  responsible. 

te  ghere  noot  (1.  138),  in  groter  noot  (1.  869),  beside  minen 
noot  (1.  220),  dorden  noot  (1.  249)  (OE.  nied  f.). 

in  alder  tijt  (1.  243)  beside  langhen  tijt  (1.  27),  sekeren 
tijt  (1.  132),  ten  selven  tide  (1.  678)  (OE.  tul  f.). 


26  BEATEIJS 


Proper  Names 

60.  Men's  names  are  inflected  as  strong  stems  when  they  end 
in  a  cons.,  and  as  weak  stems  when  they  end  in  a  vowel.  The 
d.s.  is  often  extended  to  the  a.s. :  Lazaruse  (1.  218).  Women's 
names  have,  as  a  rule,  a  g.s.  in  -en,  a  d.s.  in  -en  or  -e,  and  an  a.s. 
in  -e  or  -en  : 

nom.  Maria  (1.  205),  gen.  Marien  (1.  238),  dat.  Marien  (1.  8), 
ace.  Maria  (1.  1031),  Marien. 


ADJECTIVES 

61.  Adjectives  in  Prim.Gmc.  belonged  to  one  of  three  classes 
(1)  the  a-  (ja-)  stems,  (2)  the  i-stems,  (3)  the  tf-stems.  No  trace  of 
this  distinction  is  left  in  MDu.,  except  in  the  form  of  the  n.s.m. 
and  n.,  which  ends  either  in  a  cons,  or  in  weak  -e.  The  latter  ending 
is  organically  due  to  the  ja-stems,  the  i-  and  w-stems  ;  the  conso- 
nantal ending  is  typical  for  original  a-stems.  But  even  this 
distinction  is  often  effaced  by  analogical  new  formations,  so  that 
some  adjj.  have  both  forms  in  the  n.s.m.  and  n. :  hoghe  beside 
hooch,  traghe  beside  traech  (OE.  heah,  trctg). 

62.  Adjectives  in  MDu.  are  also  declined  as  strong  or  weak. 
But  the  original  difference  between  the  two  classes  was  greatly 
obscured  by  the  tendency  to  assimilate  the  endings  of  the  weak 
adj.  to  those  of  the  pronoun  by  which  it  was  preceded,  so  that 
such  forms  as  van  der  *sco(o)nen  smale,  der  *quaetsten  sonderen  were 
replaced  by  van  der  scoonder  smale  (1.  192),  der  quaetster  sonderen 
(1.  520).  The  tendency  to  drop  final  -n  of  weak  syllables  (§  46) 
was  also  conducive  to  the  coalescence  of  weak  with  strong  forms. 
The  only  endings  of  the  weak  inflexion  which  were  left  intact  by 
this  assimilative  process  were  then.s.m.n.  and  a.s.n.,  which  have 
no  ending  in  the  strong  inflexion  and  take  -e  in  the  weak  class. 
And  even  here  the  distinction  does  not  hold  good  in  all  cases, 
as,  according  to  §  61,  a  great  many  adjj.  ended  in  -e  in  their 
uninflected  form.  The  weak  g.s.m.  retains  its  original  -en 
beside  -es. 

63.  The  declension  of  the  MDu.  adj.  is,  accordingly,  as  follows 
(the  weak  forms  are  placed  between  square  brackets) : 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  27 


Sing. 

Masc.                         Ntr. 

Fern. 

groot  [grote] 

grote 

grotes  [groten] 

groter(e), 

.(e)re 

groten 

groter(e), 

-(e)re 

groten                groot  [grote] 

grote 

Flur,  M.N.F. 

grote 

groter(e),  -(e)re 

groten 

grote 

64.  The  ending  -ere  is  usually  spelt  -re  after  I,  n,  /•,  as 
in  aire  dogJiet  (1.  813),  dulre  minne  (1.  986).  This  is  probably 
a  spelling  for  syllabic  r.  Such,  at  any  rate,  must  have  been  its 
pronunciation,  as  otherwise  no  d  would  have  developed  after 
the  liquid  or  nasal  (cf.  §  39),  as  e.  g.  in  van  der  seconder  smale 
(1.  192).   After  other  conss.  the  usual  spelling  of  the  ending  is  -er : 

met  starker  minnen  (11.  75,  106),  met  vleescheliJcer  sonde  (1.  70), 
van  witter  siden  (1.  281),  siere  liever  moeder  (1.  572),  in  goeder 
trouwen  (1.  782),  in  groter  noot  (1.  869). 

'  Words  in  -er  drop  the  ending  •{e)r{e)  altogether,  as  in  in  donJcer 
nacJit,  '  in  the  dark  night '. 

Note.  In  so  groten  sondare  (1.  686)  -en  is  not  an  inflexional 
ending  of  groot,  but  the  enclitio  article,  which  after  so  takes 
its  place  between  the  uninflected  adj.  and  the  noun. 


I 


65.  The  weak  forms,  as  far  as  they  were  distinguishable  from 
the  strong  ones,  were  used  after  a  determinative  pronoun.  The 
indefinite  article  een  and  its  negation  (ne)gheen  were  followed  by 
the  strong  adj.  Possessive  pronouns,  which  had  no  determinative 
meaning,  were  originally  followed  by  the  strong  adj.,  but  the 
weak  forms  became  gradually  more  frequent.  When  the  attribu- 
tive adj.  stands  unaccompanied,  it  takes  the  strong  form,  except 
before  proper  names  and  in  the  vocative  when  placed  after 
its  noun.  Before  the  noun  in  the  vocative,  usage  fluctuates, 
although  the  strong  adj.  is  preferred  in  this  position  : 

here  lieve  (1.  215),  vrouwe  goede  (1.  576),  but  magJiet  fijn 
(1.  811),  vercoren  lief  {I.  Ill),  beside  vercorne  vrient  (1.  142), 
lieve  scone  joncJiere  (1.  396). 


28  BEATKIJS 

In  predicative  use  the  adj.  is  invariable.  But  it  seems  that  adjj. 
in  this  function  w^ere  apt  to  be  regarded  as  adverbs,  as  they  often 
take  -e,  which  can  hardly  be  the  inflexional  ending  of  the  adj.  :  die 
nonne  was  Jiot^esche  (1.  19). 

66.  Post-positive  adjj.  were,  as  a  rule,  not  inflected,  except 
where  the  inflected  form  might  be  of  use  in  rhyming  : 

in  die  hoeJce  sijn  (1.  16),  mantele  ende  caproen  groot  (1.  169), 
herouwennesse  also  groot  (1.  485),  enen  hoven  heet  (1.  626),  met 
lichte  soo  scone  (1.  768),  scoen  cordeivane,  rhyming  with  ane 
(11.  277-8),  na  der  naturen  sine,  rhyming  with  -kine  (11.  333-4). 

When  a  noun  is  accompanied  by  two  adjj.,  and  the  second  of  these 
is  placed  after  its  noun  with  repetition  of  the  def.  article,  the  post- 
positive adj.  is  inflected.  In  1.  465,  however,  this  rule  had  to 
yield  to  the  necessity  of  rhyming:  diescameliJce  sonden  ende  die  zwaer. 

67.  Adjectives  that  were  used  as  nouns  took  the  weak  form 
orig  But  the  strong  form  is  equally  frequent  in  MDu.  : 

st^n  lief  (1.  99),  vercoren  lief  (1.  Ill),  lief,  leet,  tsuete  metten 
sueren  (1.  140). 

The  Comparison  op  Adjectives 

68.  The  endings  of  the  comparative  and  superlative  are  -er(e), 
-re,  and  (e)st  (cf.  §  28).  A  few  adjj.  form  their  comparatives  and 
superlatives  from  a  different  root  than  the  positive  : 

goet  beter  (adj.),  bat,  bet  (advv.)     best 

slecht  wers  (adv.)  werst 

vele  mee,  meer  (advv.)  meest 

groot  mere  meest 

clone  min(d.)re,  minder  minst 

luttel  min  (adv.)  minst 

spade  later  laatst,  lest 

Note.  The  comparative  is  often  replaced  by  bat  (bet)  +  the 
positive. 

69.  The  Declension  of  the  Comparative  was  originally  weak.  But 
the  prevalence  of  the  strong  endings  in  the  positive  introduced 
them  also  into  the  comparative.  But  where  the  position  of 
the  adj.  would  require  the  uninflected  form  in  the  positive,  the 
comparative  is  always  weak.  The  g.d.s.f.  and  g.p.  are  usually  spelt 
-erre,  although  the  r  was  doubtless  short  (cf.  §  35,  note).     The 

final  -^of  the  d.m.n.s.,  a.s.m.,  and  d.p.  is  mostly  dropped. 


GKAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION 


29 


PRONOUNS 
70.  Personal 

(The  enclitic  forms  are  placed  between  square  brackets.) 


First  Person 

Second  Person 

N. 

ic,  icke 

Singular 

du 

G. 
D.A 

mijns 
mi 

dijns 
di 

N. 

wi(e) 

Plural 

ghi  [-i] 

G. 

onser,  ons 

uwer,  uw(e)s 

D.A 

ons 

Third  Person 

u 

p' 

Singular 

Masc. 

Ntr. 

Fern. 

N. 
G. 

D. 

A. 

hi  [-1]                        het  [-(ejt] 
syns  [-s] 

hem(e)  [-em]  §  46 

hem(e),  [-eii(e),  -ne]  het  [-(e)t] 

si,  soe  [-se] 

haers,  hare,  haar  [-er(e), 

-re,  -der] 
hare,  haer,  hore  [-er(e), 

-re,  -der] 
haer,  hare,  hore  [-se] 

1^'  Plural 

N.  si  [se] 

G.  haers,  hare,  haer  [-er(e),  -re,  -der] 

D.  hem,  hen  [-en] 

A.  hem,  hen  [-se] 

71.  The  forms  du  and  di  when  used  enclitically  assimilate  their 
d  to  a  preceding  t :  vinstu  <  vintst  du  (1.  681).  The  plural  ghi  [-i] 
is  used  as  a  polite  form  of  address  in  the  singular  along  with  du. 
See  e.  g.  the  speech  of  the  angel  to  Beatrijs,  11.  673  if. ;  where  du  and 
ghi  alternate  indiscriminately  {du,  d/ijns,  u,  ghi,  mven,  u,  dijn,  du, 
-i,  ghi,  &c.). 

The  forms  of  the  g.s.  mijns,  dijns,  sijns,  haers  (OE.  vmn,pin, 
sin,  hire)  took  their  final  -s  from  the  nominal  declension.  The 
forms  of  the  d.s.  mi,  di,  hem(e)  were  extended  to  the  a.s.,  whose 
organic  forms  would  have  been  *mic,  *dic,  Viene  (OE.  niec,  pec, 
hine).     The  plural  ghi  arose  from  Gmc.  *ji£!  (cf.  §  48).     When  this 


30  BEATRIJS 

*ji-  was  used  as  an  enclitic  it  lost  its  j,  so  that  the  enclitic  form  of 
ghi  became  -i.  Before  this  4  <  -*ji,  final  t  <  d  <  Gmc.  /  (§  41) 
appears  as  d,  except  where  this  t  is  preceded  by  another  voiceless 
cons.  : 

segdi  (11.  307,  346,  586),  moghedi  (11.  321,  684,  758),  seldi 
(1.  324),  waerdi  (1.  352). 

Reflexive 

72.  The  personal  pronoun  is  also  used  as  a  reflexive  pronoun, 
for  which  MDu.  has  no  special  form.  The  enclitic  form  of  the 
reflexive  a.s.m.  is  -em,  not  en(e) : 

hi  haestem  (1.  91),  (hi)  haddem  den  diwel  op  ghegeven  (1.  521). 

Possessive 

73.  The  uninflected  forms  are  mijn,  dijn,  sijn,  hare  (haer), 
ons(e),  uw(e)(u).  The  pronoun  sijn  originally  referred  to  the 
chief  person  of  the  sentence,  irrespective  of  gender  and  number. 
Traces  of  this  earlier  usage  are  not  infrequent  in  MDu.,  though 
the  more  usual  practice  is  to  restrict  its  employment  to  the  masc. 
and  neuter  sg.,  whereas  hare  (haer)  is  the  prevalent  poss.  pron.  of 
the  fem.  sg.  and  the  plural.  These  pronouns  are  declined  as  strong 
adjj.  But  invariable  forms  are  not  infrequent  in  the  n.a.s.f. 
and  n.a.p. 

Demonstrative 

74.  The  simple  dem.  pron.  is  used  also  as  a  definite  article. 
The  forms  between  square  brackets  occur  only  in  the  latter  func- 
tion. The  others  are  used  in  both.  The  e  of  the  bracketed  forms 
stands  for  9. 

Singular 


Masc.                           Ntr. 

Fem. 

N. 

die  [d(e)]                      dat 

die  [de] 

G. 

dies,  des  [des] 

dier(e)  [der] 

D. 

dien  [den] 

dier(e)  [der] 

A. 

dien  [den]                   dat 
Plural 
N.A.     die  [de] 

die  [de] 

G.        dier(e),  der 

[der] 

D.         dien  [den] 

GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION 


31 


An  old  instr.  n.s.  survives  in  di,  occurring  in  the  adv.  bedi 
•  therefore ',  and  in  de,  te,  used  before  comparatives  just  as  OE. 
/y,  pon.  The  change  of  de  >  te  is  due  to  its  frequent  occurrence 
after  voiceless  sounds  (deste,  niettemin,  &c.) : 

te  bat  (1.  230),  te  leder  (1.  266),  te  min  (1.  358),  te  soehter 
(1.  824). 

as 


75.  The   com 

pound    demonstrative 

pronoun    is    declined 

follows : 

Singular 

Masc. 

Ntr. 

Fern. 

N.     dese 

dit,  ditte 

dese 

G. 

des 

deser(e),  derre 

D. 

desen 

deser(e),  derre 

A.     desen 

dit,  ditte 
Plural 

dese 

N.  A.     dese 

G. 

deser(e), 

derre 

D. 

desen 

76.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  ghene,  gone  was  declined  as  a 
strong  adj.  The  n.a.s.n.  has,  beside  ghene,  gheen,  an  older  form 
gheent,  ghent,  ghint  (cf.  Goth,  jainata).  Thefoims  of  the  g.d.s.f. 
and  g.p.  are  gheenre,  gherre,  and  a  less  accented  ghere  (cf.  §  46). 


Interrogative 

77.  This  pronoun  had  originally  no  feminine  forms  ;  but  the 
analogy  of  the  dem.  pron.  gave  rise  to  a  separate  feminine  declen- 
sion. A  plural  was  also  wanting  in  the  Gmc.  parent  language. 
But  the  new  g.s.f.,  which  in  the  adjectival  and  pronominal 
declensions  is  always  identical  with  the  g.p.,  was  naturally  also 
employed  in  the  latter  function : 


Singular 
Masc.  Ntr. 

N.     wie  wat 

G.        wes,  wies  (wiens) 
D.        wien 
A.     wien  wat 


Fern. 
wie 

wes,  wies ;  wier(e) 
wien ;  wier(e) 
wien ;  wie 


32  BEATKIJS 

Plural 
N.     wie 

G.     wes,  wies  ;  wiere,  wier 
D.     wien 
A.     wien ;  wie 

Note.  Wat  being  a  subst.  was  naturally  followed  by  a 
genitive  case  :  wat  groter  romve  (1.  873),  wat  ambocJite  (1.  26). 

Eelative 

78.  A  relative  pronoun  proper  did  not  exist  in  the  Germanic 
parent  language.  MDu.  employed  the  forms  of  the  dem.  and 
interrog.  pronouns  to  supply  the  deficiency,  the  latter  almost 
exclusively  in  the  oblique  cases.  Die  in  this  function  often 
remains  uninflected  (1.  77),  which  makes  it  probable  that  in  it  the 
old  relative  particle  OLFr.,  OS.,  OHG.  thie,  the,  OE.  /e  survives. 
The  demonstrative  antecedent  and  the  relative  pronoun  are  often 
expressed  together  by  the  simple  demonstrative : 

die  daer  hi  haren  hinderen  sat  \  si  seide  (1.  585),  diet  mi  seide 
hine  loocJi  niet  (1.  591),  ic  sal  u  deilen  weder\  dat  mi  verJeent  onse 
here  (11.  570-1),  dat  hi  seide  heeft  si  verstaen  (1.  973). 

Indefinite 

79.  a.  Een,  originally  a  numeral,  is  used  as  an  indefinite 
pronoun.  Its  declension  does  not  differ  from  that  of  groot  (§  63), 
except  that  the  g.s.m.n.  is  always  eens,  and  the  n.a.f.  either  one 
or  een.  Een  occurs  also  in  the  d.s.m.n.  and  a.s.m.  beside  enen. 
In  the  g.d.s.f.  ere  is  used  beside  eenre  (§  46).  The  same  remarks 
apply  to  its  compound  (ne)gheen. 

h.  Ander  has  originally  strong  forms  only.  But  it  developed 
a  weak  declension  after  the  def.  art.  When  ander  is  used  in 
contradistinction  to  another  pronoun  to  express  reciprocity,  it 
stands  without  article  : 

dit  gheloofde  elc  ander  en  (1.  159). 

c.  Elc,  sulc,  are  regular  strong  adjj.  although  invariable  forms 
are  not  infrequent.  Of  enech,  somech,  and  meneeh,  uninflected 
forms  occur  in  the  d.s.m.n,  a.s.m.,  n.a.s.f.,  and  in  the  plural 
beside  the  regular  strong  endings  : 

a.s.m.  meneeh  sondare  (1.  1017),  a.s.f.  meneghe  sonde  (1.  458), 
a.  p.  meneeh  tverven  (1.  104). 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  33 

d.  Menech  as  a  noun  is  often  preceded  by  the  def.  art.,  and 
when  that  is  the  case  takes  the  weak  endings.  The  frequent 
occurrence  of  die  menighe  (1. 518),  '  many  a  one  ',  gave  rise  to  the 
use  of  the  same  weak  form  without  the  article,  as  in  1.  49,  meneghe 
worpt  si  onder  voet,  where  meneghe  must  not  be  explained  as  an 
a. p.,  because  menech  as  a  noun  is  never  pluralized. 

e.  Som,  *  some ',  is  nearly  always  used  as  a  noun  and  almost 
exclusively  in  the  plural :  some,  somer,  somen,  some.  Unin- 
ilected  forms,  however,  are  equally  frequent. 

/.  Al  as  an  adj.  has  strong  declension.  When  it  is  separated 
from  its  noun  by  a  determinative  pronoun  it  is  replaced  by  an 
adverbial  al  or  alle.  That  these  two  forms  are  not  invariable 
forms  of  the  adj.  appears  from  the  use  of  aJle  before  a  singular  noun 
and  before  nouns  in  the  g.d.p.  (cf.  Verdam,  Mnl.WB.,  s.v.  aZ, 
col.  312-15): 

al  onsen  daghen  (1.   122),  in  olden  tiden  (1.  604),  alle  die 
cloosters  (1.  610). 

This  construction  is  the  only  possible  one  when  al  is  used  in 
the  sg.  in  the  sense  of  '  entire ' : 

alt  covent  (1.  36),  alder  werelt  (1.  294),  in  alder  tijt  (1.  243). 

As  a  noun,  al  in  the  sg.  is  always  neuter,  g.s.  alles  (1.  269), 
als  (1.  648).  The  regular  plural  form  is  alle  (1.  174),  but  alien, 
originally  the  dative  form,  is  extended  to  the  whole  of  the  plural. 

g.  Vele  was  originally  a  neuter  noun,  and  was  followed  by 
a  partitive  genitive : 

hoe  vele  gheluux  ende  onghevals  (1.  60),  soe  vele  rusten  (1.  123), 
vele  doghens  (1.  485),  der  es  soo  vele  (1.  498). 

When  a  plural  noun  followed,  the  final  -e  of  vele  was  naturally 
felt  to  be  the  plural  ending,  and  from  a  noun  in  the  sg.,  employed 
in  the  sense  of  *  a  lot ',  vele  became  an  adj.  in  the  plural,  equiva- 
lent in  meaning  to  E.  '  many '.  As  a  natural  consequence,  vele 
lost  its  substantival  character  also  in  the  sg.  and  changed  its 
meaning,  accordingly,  from  '  a  great  deal '  to  '  much  \ 

h.  (]Sr)ieman,  (n)iemen  <  {n)ie  man  has  regular  strong  declen- 
sion :  (n)iemens,  (n)iemen(n)e,  (n)iemen.  The  dative  form  is 
often  extended  to  the  ace,  as  in  the  declension  of  nearly  all  MDu. 
pronouns. 


34  BEATRIJS 

i.    (N)iet  <  {n)ie  wicht  (OE.  zviht  *  thing '),  g.s.  (n)iets. 
h.  Men  [mon]  is  the  unaccented  form   of  man,   and  occurs 
only  as  a  subject  of  the  sentence  (cf.  Fr.  '  on  '). 

NUMERALS 
80.  Cardinal  Ordinal 

1  een  (OE.  an,  §  23).    Declined     eerste,  ierste  (1.  427),  §  23  note 

according  to  §  79.  (OE.  deresta), 

2  twee  (OE.  twa,  n.f.,  §  23),  g.      ander,  §  79  &,  c  (OE.  oJ>er), 

tweer,  d.  twee(n)  (11.  400, 
644). 

3  drie    (OE.   Mo,    §  .23),   g.     derde  (OE.  Pridda,  §  47). 

drie(r),  d.  drie(n). 

4  vier  (OE.  feower,  §  23),  g.     vierde  (OE. /eo(«^e)r/a). 

vierre,  d.  vier(en). 

5  vijf  (OE.  M  §  46),  d.  viven.     vijfte,  vifte  (§  22),  vichte  (§;j  22, 

U)  (01^.  flfta). 

6  ses    (OE.    siex,    §    41),     d.      seste  (OE.  sieoda), 

sessen. 

7  seve(n)(0E.5eq/b/^),  d.  seven     sevende,  sevenste. 

(<sevenen,  §§  10,  30). 

8  achte  (OE.  eahta),  d.  achten.     achtende  <  achtede  (OE.  eahtoj^a) 

on  the  analogy  of  sevende 
and  neghende.  Also  achtste, 
achste  (§  38). 

9  neghen  (OE.  ni^on,  §  10),  d.     neghende. 

neghen  (§  30). 

10  tien  (OE.  tUn),  d.  tienen.         tiende,  tienste. 

11  e-lleven  (OE.  en(d)le(o)fan\     ellefte  (OE.  en(d)le(o)fta\  elle- 

d.  elleven,  elven.  venste,  ellefste. 

12  twel(e)f,     tweelf,     twalef,     twaelfte    (OE.    twelfta),    twe- 

twaelf,twellef(0E.^2(;e?y).         lefste,  twaelefste. 

13  dertien       (OE.      preoiiene,     -tiende,  -tienste,  &c. 

preottyne,  §  47). 

14  viertien,  &c. 

20  twintech  (OE.  twentig,  §  18,     twintechste,  &c. 

note). 
30  derteeh  (OE.>n^%,  §  47). 
40  viertech,  &c. 


GKAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  35 

Cardinal 

50  vijftech. 

60  (t)sestech. 

70  (t)seventech  (OE.   hund- 

seofontig). 
80  tachtech  (OE.  himdedhta- 

tig). 
90  neghentech, 
100  hondert. 
200  twee  hondert,  &c. 
1000  dusent. 

The  cardinal  numbers  4-19  remained,  as  a  rule,  uninflected 
when  they  stood  before  a  noun.  When  placed  after  a  noun  or 
pronoun  they  were  declined  and  took  -e  in  the  n.a.  When  they 
are  nouns  themselves,  they  are  also  declined  and  take  -e  in  n.a. 

VERBS 

81.  The  MDu.  verb  has  both  inflected  and  compound  forms. 
The  inflected  forms  are  limited  to  the  present  and  preterite  tenses 
of  the  active  voice.  Both  these  tenses  contain  two  complete 
moods,  an  indicative,  and  a  subjunctive  which  is  used  also  as  an 
optative.  The  present  tense,  moreover,  has  an  imperative  mood. 
The  tenses  in  both  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  distinguish 
between  a  singular  and  a  plural,  and  between  three  persons  in 
each  number.  The  imperative  is  restricted  to  the  2nd  pers.  sing, 
and  pi.  There  are  three  verbal  nouns :  an  infinitive,  a  present 
participle  with  active  meaning,  and  a  past  participle  with  passive 
meaning.  The  periphrastic  infinitive  or  supine  is  formed  by  pre- 
fixing the  preposition  te  to  the  infinitive  in  the  d.s.  (te  ludene,  1.  34). 
A  gerund  occurs  in  the  g.d.s.,  which  are  usually  explained  by 
Dutch  grammarians  as  the  oblique  cases  of  the  infinitive. 

The  compound  forms  are  used  for  the  future  and  perfect  tenses. 
The  number  of  periphrastic  forms  is  very  great.  The  usual  auxi- 
liaries are  sullen  for  the  future  ;  sijn,  werden,  sometimes  bliven 
for  the  passive  voice  ;  and  hebben  or  sijn  for  the  perfect  tenses. 

The  Endings 

82.  Middle  Dutch  verbs,  apart  from  a  few  anomalous  forms,  are 
divided  into  two  great  classes :  strong  (or  gradation)  verbs,  and 

d2 


86  BEATKIJS 

weak  verbs.  The  strong  verbs  are  distinguished  by  a  pret.  tense 
with  change  of  root-vowel,  the  weak  by  a  preterite  formed  with 
a  dental  suffix. 

There  is  no  means  of  distinguishing  between  weak  and  strong 
verbs  in  the  present  tense,  which  has  the  same  endings  for  both 
classes.  Original  differences  between  the  two  were  levelled  out  at 
an  early  date.  The  2nd  p.s.  imper.  was  originally  without  ending 
in  the  strong  verbs,  and  took  the  ending  -e  in  the  weak  verbs  (cf. 
OE.  her,  2nd  p.s.  imp.  of  heran,  and  n^re,  2nd  p.s.  imp.  of  n^ricm). 
But  in  MDu.  either  form  is  allowable  of  any  verb. 

The  endings  of  the  present  tense  are : 

Imper.  Inf.  Ger. 
Sg.  1.    -e                            -e                         —  -en 

-e  G.  -ens 

—  D.  -ene 


PI. 


Indie. 

Suhj. 

1. 

-e 

-e 

2. 

-es,  -s 

-es,  -s 

3. 

-et,  -t 

-e 

1. 

-en 

-en 

2. 

-et,  -t 

(cf.§ 

36, 

-et,  -t 

note  2) 

3. 

-en 

-en 

■et,  -t 


Part. 
-ende 


Note.  The  Gmc.  vowel  change  in  the  second  and  third 
p.s.  (cf.  Wright,  O.E.G.,  §  476)  has  left  no  traces  in  MDu.  The 
forms  were  assimilated  to  those  of  the  1st  p.s.  and  the  plural. 

Forms  with  early  syncope  of  the  vowel  in  the  endings  -es, 
-et  have  a  short  stem- vowel  alternating  with  lengthened  e  in 
Classes  IV  and  V :  spreken  (1.  47),  sprect  (1.  112),  ic 
come  (1.  151),  ghi  comt  (1.  158),  ic  neme  (1.  495),  nemt 
(1.  141).  When  a  verbal  stem  ends  in  a  voiced  cons.,  the 
latter  is  unvoiced  before  the  syncopated  ending  -t.  The 
spelling  does  not  indicate  the  change  consistently :  bidt  (pron. 
Ut,  1.  439),  hebt  (1.  266). 

83.  Preterite. 

The  endings  of  the  indicative  and  optative  in  the  pret.  have 
fallen  together  in  both  classes.     Those  of  the  strong  verbs  are  : 


Sg.    1.   -;              2.   -(e)s; 

3.    — 

PI.    1.   -en;            2.   -(e)t; 

3.   -en 

Participle  -en. 

The  weak  endings  are : 

Sg.    1.   -de  (-den);       2.   -des  ;        3. 

-de  (-den. 

I.  984) 

PI.    1.   -den;                2.    -det ;         3. 

-den 

Participle  -t  (d). 

GKAMMATICAL  INTEODUCTION  87 

The  p.p.  is  formed  with  the  prefix  ghe-,  whose  original  function 
was  to  represent  the  action  of  the  verb  as  complete  and  reaching 
a  definite  result,  so  that  it  was  primarily  suited  as  a  prefix  of 
the  p.p.  Such  verbs,  however,  in  whose  meaning  the  idea  of 
completion  was  already  inherent,  formed  their  p.p.  without  this 
prefix  : 

comen  (11.  297,  715,  900),  worden  (1.  523),  vonden,  leden 
(p.p.  of  liden,  'pass'),  braeht,  broeht  (p.p.  of  bringhen). 

Neither  do  verbs  with  an  unaccented  prefix  form  their  p.p. 
with  ghe-;  hence  bleven  (11.  5,  435),  p.p.  of  hliveiKhe'Uven 
(OE.  helifan). 

Note.  The  final  -e  of  the  endings  of  the  1st  p.s.  pres.  ind., 
1st  and  3rd  p.s.  pres.  subj.,  and  1st  and  3rd  p.s.  pret.  is 
dropped  before  the  enclitic  pronouns  -ic  and  -i  (§  70).  Such 
rare  forms  as  ic  ducht  (1.  301),  die  soebt  (1.  641),  with  excep- 
tional loss  of  -e  after  a  stress  syllable  (§  31),  are  derived 
from  the  syncopated  forms  duchtic  (<ducht{d)-ic),  sochti 
(<socht(9yi). 

Strong  Verbs 

84.  The  complete  conjugation  of  the  strong  verbs  in  Prim.Gmc., 
owing  to  the  vowel  change  in  the  root-syllable,  is  made  up  of  four 
stems,  which  appear  respectively  (1)  in  the  present  tense,  (2)  in 
the  singular  of  the  pret.  ind.,  (3)  in  the  pret.  plural  and  the  subj., 
(4)  in  the  past  participle.  The  form  of  the  2nd  p.s.  of  the  pret.  was 
in  WGmc.  based  on  the  stem  of  the  plural  (OE.  ic  hand,  pu  htrnde^ 
probably  a  subjunctive  form),  but  in  MDu.  it  was  assimilated  to 
the  rest  of  the  sg.,  and  adopted  the  ending  -s  of  the  2nd  p.s.  pres. 
ind.  and  of  the  2nd  p.s.  of  the  weak  pret. 

Class  I 

85.  The  first  strong  class  had  the  following  gradation  in  Prim. 
Gmc. : 

(1)  l  (OE.  I) ;  (2)  at  (OE.  a) ;  (3)  i  (OE.  i) ;  (4)  i  (OE.  i). 
The  corresponding  MDu.  forms  are  developed  quite  regularly  : 

(1)  ij  (§  21) ;  (2)  ee  (§  23) ;  (3)  e  (§  10) ;  (4)  e  (§  10). 
bliven  (1.  44),  bleef  (11.  200,  573),  bleven  (1.  405),  bleven 
(11.  5,  435). 

bliken  (1.  503),  driven  (11.  554,  873),  crighen  (11.  48,  1011), 
I  liden   (11.  244,  933),   riden   (11.  95,  134,  163,  398),  scinen 

(11.  519,  568,  643),  striken  (1.  593),  swighen  (11.  47,  355,  1012), 
beswiken  (1.  308),  wiken  (1.  594) ;  gheliken  (orig.  wk.). 


38  BEATEIJS 


Class  II 


86.  The  Germanic  gradation  of  this  class  was  : 

(1)  eu  (OE.  eo) ;  (2)  au  (OE.  ea) ;  (3)  u  (OE.  u)  ;  (4)  o  (OE.  o). 
The  development  in  MDu.  is  again  quite  regular  : 
(1)  ie  (§  23) ;  (2)  oo  (§  23) ;  (3)  6  (§  10) ;  (4)  6  (§  10). 

bieden  (11.  438,  729,  754),  bedrieghen  (1.  966),  verdrieten, 
lieghen  (11.  591,  804,  965),  verliesen  (1.  957),  kiesen  (11.  316, 
377),  tien  (11.  118,  233,  776). 

Note.  On  the  grammatical  change  in  verliesen,  kiesen, 
and  tien  cf.  §  43.  On  the  contracted  form  of  tien  cf. 
§§  24,  41. 

A  small  group  of  verbs  belonging  to  this  class  have  an  aorist 
present  with  weak-grade  vowel  (Grmc.  u,  01^.  u;  cf.  Wright, 
O.E.G.,  §§472,  496): 

luken  (OE.  lucan),  ontpluken  (1.  335),  ruken  (1.  336), 
scuven  (1.  664),  sluten  (11.  252,  790). 

Note.  Rouwen  (§  26)  originally  belonged  to  this  class 
(OE.  hreowan),  pret.  rau  and  rou.  The  p.p.  *gherouwen  does 
not  occur.    But  weak  forms  become  gradually  more  frequent. 

Class  III 

87.  The  Gmc.  gradation  was  : 

(1)  e  (OE.  e,  eo),  i  (before  nasal  +  cons.)  (OE.  i) ;  (2)  a  (OE.  a, 
g,  ea) ;   (3)  u  (OE.  u) ;   (4)  o  (OE.  o),  u  (before  nasal  +  cons.) 
(OE.  u). 
The  corresponding  MDu.  forms  are  : 

(1)  e  (§  9),  i  (before  nasal  +  cons.) ;    (2)  a  (§9);    (3)  o  (§9); 
(4)  o  (§  9  and  §  17  on  old-  >  oud-). 
werde  (1.  231),  wart  (11.  256,  419,  422),   worden  (1.   1028), 
worden  (1.  523,  §  83). 

belghen  (1.  365),  berghen  (1.  502),  bernen  (berren,  §  46) 
(1.  837),  bederven  (11.  129,  640),  helpen  (hulpen,  §  17,  note) 
(11.  464,  800,  889,  949,  1033),  sterven  (11.  71,  639),  werpen 
(worpen,  §  15)  (1.  937). 

binden  (1.  280),  drinken  (1.  897),  dwinghen  (11.  46,  93), 
beghinnen  (11.  9,  18,  291),  rinnen  (1.  61),  singhen  (11.  195, 
333,  357),  spinnen  (11.  417,  445),  vinden  (11.  16,  20,  54,  242, 
677,  681,  807),  winnen  (11.  348,  408,  478,  992). 

Note  1.  (Be)velen  (OE.  Jeolan,  Goth,  filhan)  passed  into 
the  fourth  class  owing  to  the  loss  of  the  h. 


GRAMMATICAL  INTRODUCTION  39 

Note  2.  Before  r  +  lip  and  back  conss.  a  alternates  with  e 
(cf.  §  15)  in  the  pret.  sg. :  bereh,  sterf,  werp  beside  barch, 
&c.     Werden  has  also  wert  beside  wart  (1.  696). 

Note  3.  Beghinnen  has  an  irregular  weak  pret.  begonde, 
begonste  (11.  260,  846)  beside  began  (11.  18,  291). 

Class  IV 

88.  The  Gmc.  gradation  was  : 

(1)  e  (OE.  e) ;  (2)  a  (OE.  de) ;  (3)  de  (OE.  de,  before  nasal  6) ;  (4) 
0  (OE.  o). 
MDu. : 

(1)  e  (§  10) ;  (2)  a  (§  9) ;  (3)  a  (§  21) ;  (4)  6  (§  10). 
neme  (1.  495),  nam  (11.  88,  160,   181,   848),  naemt  (1.  638), 
ghenomen  (1.  211). 

helen  (1.  945),  (be)velen  (1.  1024  ;  cf.  §  87,  note  1),  (ghe)- 
breken  (II.  427),  spreken  (11.  47,  74,  384,  &c.),  wreken 
(1.  383),  treken  (11.  797,  809),  comen. 

Note  1.  Spreken  and  wreken  belonged  originally  to 
Class  V.  The  analogy  of  breken  accounts  for  the  vowel 
change  in  the  p.p.  (on)ghewroken,  ghesproken  (11.  384,  506). 
The  forms  of  treken  are  in  the  present  tense  often  confused 
with  those  of  a  cognate  wk.v.  treeken. 

Note  2.  Comen  with  6  <  u  in  the  pres.  tense  (OLFr. 
cuman,  OE.  cuman)  is  an  aorist  present  with  Gmc.  -urn-  from 
syllabic  -m-.  The  pret.  has  regular  forms :  sg.  quam  (11.  101, 
255),  2nd  pers.  pi.  quaemt  (1.  637),  3rd  pers.  pi.  quamen 
(1.  259),  subj.  quame  (11.  85,  382),  p.p.  comen  (11.  297,  715, 
900  ;  cf.  §  83). 

Note  3.     On  the  forms  sprect,  nemt,  eomt,  cf.  §  82,  note. 

Class  V 

89.  The  Gmc.  gradation  was: 

(1)  e  (OE.  e) ;  (2)  a  (OE.  9e) ;  (3)  de  (OE.  §e,  a) ;  (4)  e  (OE.  e). 
MDu. : 

(1)  e  (§  10) ;  (2)  a  (§  9) ;  (3)  a  (§  21) ;  (4)  e  (§  10). 

eten  (1.  421),  vergheten  (11.  165,  379,  867),  gheven  (11.  56, 
271,  282,  &c.),  lesen  (11.  210,  528,  865),  pleghen  (11.  27, 
34,  39,  &c.),  steken  (1.  115),  wesen;  sien  (§§  24,  41). 

Note  1.  Grammatical  change  is  found  in  the  pret.  pi.  and 
subj.  of  sien  and  wesen :  pret.  sg.  sach  (11.  172,  430),  was 


40  BEATKIJS  ' 

(11.  17,  19,  &c.),  pret.  pi.  saghen  (11.  174,  292),  waren  (1.  92), 
subj.  ware  (1.  297). 

Note  2.     On  the  form  stect  (1.  115)  cf.  §  82,  note. 

Here  belong  also  a  few  verbs  with  a  weak  present  tense  : 

ligghen  (1.  682),  3rd  pers.  sg.  pres.  ind.  leit  (1.  762,  §  24), 
leet  (1.  948),  pret.  sg.  lach  (11.  219,  914),  pi.  laghen  (1.  851), 
subj.  laghe  (1.  86),  p.p.  gheleghen ;  bidden,  bat  (11.  72,  655, 
841,  975),  baden,  ghebeden  (1.  424) ;  sitten  (1.  97),  sat 
(U.  105,  162),  saten  (1.  107),  gheseten  (1.  380), 


Class  VI 

90.  The  Gmc.  gradation  was : 

(1)  a  (OE.  a) ;  (2)  o  (OE.  o) ;  (3)  6  (OE.  6) ;  (4)  a  (OE.  a). 
MDu. : 

(1)  a  (§  10) ;  (2)  oe  (§  21) ;  (3)  oe  (§  21) ;  (4)  a  (§  10). 
draghen  (1.  173),  droeeh  (11.  28,  341,  935),  droeghet  (1.  815), 
ghedraghen  (1.  121). 

laden  (11.  74,  864),  varen  (11.  158,  325,  &c.),  ghewaghen 
(11.  368,  582),  slaen  (11.  245,  846,  cf.  §  27). 

Note  1.  On  the  absence  of  i-mutation  in  the  forms  of  the 
2nd  and  3rd  p.s.  pres.  ind.  cf.  §  12. 

Note  2.  6  instead  of  oe  is  found  in  si  voren  (11.  290,  401), 
droghic  (1.  510). 

A  number  of  verbs  belonging  to  this  class  have  a  weak  present 
tense  and  e  in  the  p.p.  on  the  analogy  of  the  mutated  vowel  of 
the  present.  No  mutation  of  the  a  took  place  in  lachen  (Goth. 
hlahjan)  because  of  the  following  xx  (^f-  §  12) : 

heffen  (Goth,  hafjan),  hoef  (hief),  gheheven  (1.  6) ;  sceppen 
(Goth,  skapjan),  scoep  (sciep),  gheseepen  (1.  273) ;  lachen, 
loecli  (1.  274),  pi.  loeghen  (gramm.  change),  ghelaehen. 

The  forms  hief  and  sciep  arose  on  the  analogy  of  the 
following  class.  The  double  cons,  of  the  stem-syllable 
caused  these  verbs  to  pass  into  the  class  of  the  original 
reduplicative  verbs. 

Here  belongs  also  the  irregular  verb  standen,  whose  n  was 
originally  a  distinctive  of  the  present  only.  It  intruded,  how- 
ever, into  the  forms  of  the  pret.,  as  in  OE.  it  intruded  into  the 


t 


GKAMMATICAL  INTEODUCTION  41 

p.p.  (gestanden).     Forms  of  its  cognate  staen  are  mixed  up  with 
those  of  standen  and  tend  to  supplant  the  latter  altogether  : 

3rd  p.s.  pres.  ind.  staet  (1.  276),  3rd  p.pl.  staen  (1.  611), 
3rd  p.s.  pret.  ind.  stoet  (OE.  stod,  11.  IBI,  261)  beside  stent 
(11.  226,  286),  pi.  stonden  (11.  279,  334),  pret.  subj.  stoede 
(1.  575). 

Class  VII 

91.  To  this  class  belong  those  verbs  which  in  Prim.Gmc.  had 
reduplicated  preterites  with  or  without  simultaneous  vowel  change, 
like  Gothic  haitan,  hailiait ;  Many  lailot  This  Gmc.  distinction 
between  verbs  with  and  without  change  of  the  stem-vowel  is 
effaced  in  MDu.,  as  ie  became  the  distinctive  vowel  of  the  preterite 
of  this  class.  In  this  ie  two  Gmc.  sounds — e  and  eu  {iu) — seem 
to  have  coalesced  (cf.  §  23),  e  being  the  vowel  of  the  preterite  of 
verbs  with  Gmc.  a,  de,  and  ai,  eu  {iu)  of  those  with  Gmc.  o  and  cm 
in  the  stem  of  the  present  tense.  The  origin  of  these  vowel 
sounds  and  their  exact  relation  to  those  of  the  Gothic  reduplicated 
preterites  are  not  clear.  Not  a  single  trace  of  the  original  redupli- 
cation syllable  remains  in  MDu.  The  p.p.  has  the  same  stem- 
vowel  as  the  pres.     The  principal  verbs  of  this  class  are  : 

Gmc.  a.  (1)  (ghe)vallen  (1.  400),  hanghen  (rarely  haen), 
vaen  (vanghen),  ganghen;  houden,  ghewouden  (cf.  §  17). 

Gmc.  de.  (2)  laten  (11.  320,  428,  487,  640),  raden  (1.  366), 
slapen  (1.  672),  verwaten  (1.  631). 

Gmc.  0.     (3)  roepen  (11.  227,  671). 

Gmc.  ai     (4)  heten  (11.  617,  733,  746,  1029),  sceden  (1.  803). 

Gmc.  au.     (5)  lopen  (1.  713). 

92.  The  preterites  of  vaen  (ontfaen,  cf.  §  42  ;  note),  ganghen, 
hanghen,  and  houden  have  a  shortened  stem-vowel :  vine 
(11.  708,  938),  ghinc  (11.  87,  268,  628,  678,  707),  hinc  (11.  238,  687), 
hilt  (11.  52,  64).  (Ghe)yaUen  has  either  viel  or  vel  (1.  400).  The 
infinitive  vaen  is  the  regular  development  of  Gmc.  "^fay^m-  (§  46) 
corresponding  to  OE.  fon.  The  less  usual  infinitive  vanghen  is 
based  on  the  p.p.,  in  which  the  y  had  remained  intact  before  the 
voiced  back  open  (grammatical  change,  cf.  §  43),  which  after  the 
nasal  became  a  stop  (cf.  §  39).  These  forms  with  preserved  y 
belonged  originally  to  the  p.p.  and  the  pret.  pi.  only.  But  from 
these  they  were  extended  to  the  pret.  sg.,  whence  MDu.  vine, 
hinc.      That  hanghen  has  replaced  original  haen  may  be  due 


42  BEATRIJS 

to  the  support  of  the  weak  intrans.  verb  hanghen  (OE.  hangian). 
Forms  of  the  present  tense  of  ganghen  (imper.  2nd  p.s.  gauc, 
1.  727)  are  mixed  up  with  those  of  a  cognate  verb  in  -mi  (cf. 
Wright,  O.E.G.,  §  547),  gaen  (OE.  gan),  which  have  supplanted 
them  entirely  in  Modern  Dutch  (3rd  p.s.  pres.  subj.  ga,  1.  246  ; 
2nd  p.pl.  imper.  gaet,  1.  676). 

Weak  Verbs 

93.  The  division  of  the  weak  verbs  of  the  Gmc.  parent  language 
into  three  classes  is  no  longer  possible  in  MDu.  The  verbs  of  the 
first  or  -jan  class  can  still  be  recognized  as  such  by  their  double 
consonant  after  a  short  stem-vowel,  and,  where  the  latter  was 
originally  a  or  w,  by  the  mutation  vowels  e  and  u  (cf.  §§  12,  13). 
But  verbs  of  this  class  with  a  long  stem-vowel  have  no  character- 
istic left  to  distinguish  them  from  those  of  the  second  and  third 
classes,  which  had  all  been  fused  into  one  type.  Original  -jcm 
verbs  that  retain  the  above-mentioned  characteristics  of  their 
class  are,  e.  g.  : 

(be)letten  (Goth,  latjan),  legghen  (Goth,  lagjan),  quedden 
(Gmc.  ^hwadjanan),  setten  (Goth,  satjan),  wekken  (Goth. 
(us)wakjan),  ontdecken  (Gmc.  */a^jawaw),  eussen  (OE.  cyssan), 
(ghe)ciisten,  vullen  (cf.  §  13). 

94.  The  2nd  and  3rd  p.s.  of  the  pres.  ind.  of  original  -jaw  verbs 
had,  before  the  WGmc.  doubling  of  conss.,  dropped  their  j  before 
the  i  of  the  endings  -is,  -ip,  whence  in  OE.  these  forms  have  a  single 
consonant  alternating  with  the  double  cons,  of  the  1st  p.s.  and 
the  plural.  In  MDu.  the  form  of  the  latter  was  levelled  out 
to  the  whole  of  the  singular,  except  in  a  few  verbs  which  retain 
the  old  alternation  beside  the  new  and  more  uniform  system  : 
Legghen  (1.  131)  has  ic  legghe,  du  leghes,  hi  leghet  (leit,  §  24), 
and  on  the  analogy  of  hi  leit  also  ghi  leit  in  the  2nd  p.pl. 
(1.  364)  instead  of  ghi  leg(ghe)t.  Segghen,  originally  a  verb  of 
Class  III,  has  similar  forms  to  those  of  legghen  :  seggie  (1.  30), 
men  seit  (1.  455),  2nd  p.pl.  wat  segdi  (11. 307,  346  ;  cf.  §  36,  note  2). 
The  original  distribution  of  forms  with  and  without  double  cons, 
is  kept  perfectly  intact  in  the  pres.  ind.  of  hebben,  also  originally 
a  verb  of  Class  III :  ic  hebbe  (11.  6,  228),  du  heves  (1.  673), 
hi  heeft  (<  lievet,  1.  436),  wi  hebben  (1.  121),  ghi  hebbet  (1.  118), 
hebt,  hebdi  (§  36,  note  2),  si  hebben,  imper.  2nd  p.s.  hebbe 
(1.  792),  2nd  p.pl.  hebt  (1.  266). 


GEAMMATICAL  INTEODUCTION  43 

The  Weak  Preterite 

95.  The  vowel  preceding  the  dental  suffix  of  the  weak  preterite 
in  Gmc.  varied  according  to  the  class  to  which  the  verb  belonged. 
The  general  weakening  of  unaccented  vowels  to  9  (§  27)  in  MDu. 
has  effaced  this  early  distinction,  -(e)de  being  the  typical  ending 
of  all  weak  verbs  in  the  preterite.  The  preterite  of  the  -jan  verbs 
ended  in  Gmc.  in  -iffa,  so  that  there  was  no  gemination  of  the  final 
cons,  of  the  stem-syllable  in  WGmc.  Gmc.  *lati^a,  e.  g.,  would 
regularly  have  become  MDu.  *letede  >  *leette  with  lengthening  of 
the  mutated  stem-vowel  in  open  syllable  (cf.  §  10).  But  the 
alternation  of  lengthened  vowel  +  single  cons,  in  the  preterite 
with  short  vowel  +  double  cons,  in  the  present  had  to  yield  to  a 
more  uniform  system  based  on  the  form  of  the  present  tense. 
Only  legghen  and  segghen  have  more  frequently  leghede  >  leide 
(11.  234,  839,  1004),  p.p.  ghelegJiet  >  gheleit  (1.  808),  seghede  > 
seide  (11.  14,  187,  &c.),  gheseit,  rather  than  legde,  segde. 

96.  Syncope  of  the  medial  vowel  of  -ede  takes  place  after 
a  single  liquid  or  nasal,  after  a  point  stop  and  after  ^  (spelt  s). 
Fluctuation  between  -ede  and  -de  obtains  after  lip  and  back 
conss.,  after  double  liquids  and  nasals,  after  a  semi- vowel,  and  after 
s{s),  sc(h).  There  is  always  syncope  after  weak  syllables  :  wan- 
derde,  twivelde.  The  same  rules  apply  to  the  ending  -et(d)  of 
the  p.p.  The  d  of  the  ending  is,  after  the  syncope,  assimilated 
to  those  conss.  that  are  voiceless  in  their  intervocalic  position  in  the 
infinitive  (cf.  §  36). 

Note.  Verbs  whose  stem  ends  in  -d  or  -t  have  the  same 
form  for  the  1st  p.s.  pres.  and  pret.  ind.,  owing  to  the  syncope 
of  the  penultimate  in  the  preterite  ending  :  1st  p.s.  pres.  ind. 
ic  sende,  pret.  ind.  ic  sende  (cf.  §§  28,  36). 

97.  A  number  of  verbs  of  Class  I  formed  their  pret.  and  p.p.  in 
Gmc.  without  the  medial  vowel  i  (cf.  Wright,  O.E.G.,  §  534).  The 
following  verbs  belong  to  this  sub-division  : 

^  .     ,  (broehte  (1.  544)  brochti 

bringhen  ibrachte  (11. 126,  412)    brachtM  ^^ 

denken  (dinken,  §  18)  If  °^f  «^«f  °^* 

^  "     '  Idaohte  ghedaoht 

dunken  (§  18)  doohte  (11.  286,  936)      ghedooht 


44 


BEATKIJS 


rsochte  (11.  96,  241) 
soeken  j  soeht  (1.  641 ;  cf.  §  83,  \  ghesocht 

I  note) 
werken  wrochte  (OE.  worhte)      ghewrocht  (OE.  ^e- 

ivorht ;  cf.  §  47) 
eopen  cochte  (11.  167,  176)       ghecoeht 

hebben  (orig.  Class  hadde  (OLFr.  habda)      ghehadt  (rarely  spelt 
III)  ghehat) 

Minor  Groups 

Preterite-Peesents 

98.  These  verbs  were  originally  un reduplicated  perfects  which 
acquired  a  present  meaning  in  Germanic.  The  ending  of  the  2nd 
p.s.  is  either  4,  the  original  ending  in  Prim.Gmc.  (cf.  Goth. 
namt),  or  -es,  which  had  become  the  regular  ending  in  MDu. 
(cf.  §  83).  The  forms  of  the  1st  and  3rd  pers.  sg.  are  identical 
as  in  all  strong  preterites.  In  the  parent  language  a  new  weak 
pret.,  an  infin.,  apres.  part.,  and  in  some  verbs  a  strong  p.p.,  were 
added  to  the  conjugation. 

Class    I 

99.  weten. 

ic,  hi  weet  (11.  46,  76),  du  wets  (weets),  wi,  si  weten 
(OKwiton\  ghi  wet  (<  ''wetet,  §§22,  28,  11.  120,  548).  Imper. 
2nd  p.s.  wet,  wit,  2nd  p. pi.  wet,  wit,  weet.  Pret.  wiste  (11.  251, 
416),  p.p.  ghe weten. 

Class  II 

100.  doghen. 

ic,  hi  dooeh,  but  more  frequently  on  the  analogy  of  the 
regular  present  indicative  :  iedoghe,  hidoghet  (1.  391),  (doocht), 
wi,  si  doghen,  ghi  doghet.  Pret.  dochte  (1.  25),  p.p.  ghedocht, 
ghedoghen. 

Class  III 

101.  onnen  (1.  10). 

ic,  hi  an,  du  ans,  on(ne)s,  pi.  onnen.  Pret.  onde,  onste, 
p.p.  gheonnen,  gheont. 

dorren,  durren,  derren. 

ic,  hi  dar,  der,  du  dor(re)s,  dars,  ders,  durs,  pi.  dorren, 
durren,  derren.  Pret.  dorste  (1.  916),  dorst  (1.  734;  cf.  §83, 
note),  p.p.  ghedorst,  ghedurst,  ghedorren. 


GKAMMATICAL  INTKODUCTION  45 

dorven,  durven,  derven. 

ic,  hi  darf  (11.  62,  764),  derf  (cf.  §  15),  du  dorves,  dorfs, 
durfs,  derfs,  pi.  dorven,  derven  (1.  326).     Pret.  dorfte,  dorste. 

connen. 

ic,  hi  can  (1.  399),  du  cans,  con(ne)s,  const,  pi.  connen 
Pret.  conde  (11.  69,  108,  603),    conste  (11.  59,  63,  130,  417,  445), 
coste,  p.p.  gheconnen. 

Class  IV 

102.  sullen. 

ic,  hi  sal  (11.  78,  236,  267),  sel,  du  salt  (1.  650),  selt 
(1.  324),  sout  (cf.  §  17),  suit  (with  u  from  the  plural),  pi.  sullen 
(cf.  §  35),  selen  (1.  503),  2nd  p.pl.  selt  (1.  598).  Pret.  sonde 
(<  soUe,  §  17)  (11.  98,  180,  551,  1012). 

Class  V 

103.  moghen. 

ic,  hi  mach  (11.  117,  206),  du  macht,  maghes,  maechs, 
moghes,  moochs,  pi.  moghen  (11.  321,  684).  Pret.  mochte, 
mocht  (§  83,  note)  (11.  95,  378),  p.p.  ghemoghen. 

Class  VI 

104.  moeten  (auxiliary  of  the  optative  mood). 

ic,  hi  moet  (11.  10,  11,  44,  79,  &c.),  du  meets,  pi.  moeten. 
Pret.  moeste  (11.  411,  472,  842),  p.  p.  ghemoeten. 

Doen 

105.  Doen  belongs  with  gaen  (cf.  §  92)  and  staen  (cf.  §  90)  to  a 
small  group  of  verbs  in  -mi : 

ic  doe,  du  does,  hi  doet  (1.  68),  pi.  wi,  si  doen,  ghi  doet. 
Imper.  doe,  pi.  doet  (1.  361).  Pret.  dede  (11.  36,  168,  840),  subj. 
dade  (1.  53),  dede,  p.p.  ghedaen  (1.  318). 

The  Substantive  Verb 

106.  sijn  (1.  98). 

ic  bem  (§  46),  ben  (11.  74,  114,  359),  du  best,  hi  es  (11.  5,  45, 
76,  77,  «&c.),  pi.  sijn,  sijt.  Subj.  si,  sijs,  si  (11.  154,  605). 
Imper.  2nd  p.s.  wes,  2nd  p.pl.  sijt  (1.  624),  p.p.  ghesijn  (1.  601). 
The  preterite  is  supplied  by  the  forms  of  wesen  (cf.  §  89). 


46  BEATRIJS 

Willen 

107.  The  present  tense  of  this  verb  was  originally  an  optative 
which  in  Prim.Gmc.  assumed  indicative  function  : 

ie  wille  (11.  9,  26,  139,  152,  &c.),  du  wil(le)8,  wilt,  wout, 
hi  wille,  wil(le)t,  pi.  wi,  si  willen,  ghi  wil(le)t.  Pret.  woude 
(11.  101,  134),  2nd  p. pi.  ghi  wout  (11.  131,  639;  cf.  §28),  p.p. 
ghewilt. 


BEATEIJS 

Van  dichten  comt  mi  cleine  bate. 
Die  liede  raden  mi  dat  ict  late 
Ende  minen  sin  niet  en  vertare. 
Maer  om  die  doghet  van  hare 
5     Die  moeder  ende  maghet  es  bleven, 
Hebbic  een  scone  mieracle  op  heven, 
Die  god  sonder  twivel  toghede 
Marien  teren,  diene  soghede. 
Ic  wille  beghinnen  van  ere  nonnen 

10     Een  ghedichte,  god  moot  mi  onnen, 
Dat  ic  die  poente  meet  wel  geraken 
Ende  een  goet  ende  daer  af  maken, 
Volcomelijc  na  der  waerheide, 
Als  mi  brooder  Ghijsbrecht  seide, 

15     Een  begheven  willemijn  ; 
Hi  vant  in  die  boeke  sijn. 
Hi  was  een  out  ghedaghet  man. 
Die  nonne,  daer  ic  af  began, 
Was  hovesche  ende  subtijl  van  zeden ; 

20     Men  vint  ghene  noch  heden, 
Die  haer  ghelijct,  ic  wane, 
Van  zeden  ende  van  ghedane. 
Dat  ic  prisede  haer  lede, 
Sonderlinghe  haer  scoonhede, 

25    Dats  een  dine  dat  niet  en  dochte. 

Ic  wille  u  segghen,  van  wat  ambochte 
Si  plach  te  wesen  langhen  tijt: 
Int  clooster  daer  si  droech  abijt, 
Costersse  was  si  daer, 

30     Dat  seggic  u  al  over  waer; 
Sine  was  lat  no  traghe. 
No  bi  nachte  no  bi  daghe. 
Si  was  snel  te  haren  werke ; 
Si  plach  te  ludene  in  die  kerke; 


48  BEATKIJS 

35     Si  ghereide  tlicht  ende  ornament 
Ende  dede  op  staen  alt  coven t. 

Dese  ioffrouwe  en  was  niet  sonder 

Der  minnen,  die  groot  wonder 

Pleecht  te  werken  achter  lande. 
40     Bi  wilen  comter  af  scande, 

Quale,  toren,  wedermoet ; 

Bi  wilen  bliscap  ende  goet. 

Den  wisen  maect  si  ooc  soo  ries 

Dat  hi  meet  bliven  int  verlies, 
45     Eest  hem  lieft  ofte  leet. 

Si  dwingt  sulken,  dat  hine  weet 

Weder  spreken  ofte  swighen, 

Daer  hi  loon  af  waent  ghecrighen. 

Meneghe  worpt  si  onder  voet, 
50     Die  op  staet,  alst  haer  dunct  goet. 

Minne  maect  sulken  milde, 

Die  liever  sine  ghiften  hilde, 

Dade  hijt  niet  bider  minnen  rade. 

Noch  vintmen  liede  soo  ghestade, 
55     Wat  si  hebben,  groot  oft  clene, 

Dat  hen  die  minne  gheeft  ghemene: 

Welde,  bliscap  ende  rouwe  ; 

Selke  minne  hetic  ghetrouwe. 

In  constu  niet  gheseggen  als, 
60     Hoe  vele  gheluux  ende  onghevals 

liter  minnen  beken  ronnen. 

Hier  omme  en  darfmen  niet  veronnen 

Der  nonnen,  dat  si  niet  en  conste  ontgaen 

Der  minnen  diese  hilt  ghevaen, 
65     Want  die  duvel  altoos  begheert 

Den  mensche  te  become  ende  niet  en  cesseert 

Dach  ende  nacht,  spade  ende  vroe ; 

Hi  doeter  sine  macht  toe. 

Met  quaden  listen,  als  hi  wel  conde, 
70     Becordise  met  vleescheliker  sonde, 

Die  nonne,  dat  si  sterven  waende. 

Gode  bat  si  ende  vermaende, 

Dat  hise  trooste  dore  sine  ghenaden. 


BEATEIJS  49 


Si  sprac :    *  ic  ben  soo  verladen 
75     Met  starker  minnen  ende  ghewont, 

Dat  weet  hi,  dient  al  es  cont, 

Die  niet  en  es  verholen, 

Dat  mi  die  crancheit  sal  doen  dolen ; 

Ic  meet  leiden  een  ander  leven  ; 
80     Dit  abijt  moetic  begheven.' 

Nu  hoort,  hoeter  na  verghinc : 
Si  sende  om  den  ionghelinc, 
Daer  si  toe  hadde  grote  lieve, 
Ootmoedelijc  met  enen  brieve, 

85     Dat  hi  saen  te  hare  quame, 
Daer  laghe  ane  sine  vrame. 
Die  bode  ghinc  daer  de  ionghelinc  was. 
Hi  nam  den  brief  ende  las, 
Die  hem  sende  sijn  vriendinne. 

90     Doe  was  hi  blide  in  sinen  sinne; 
Hi  haestem  te  comen  daer. 
Sint  dat  si  out  waren  .XIJ.  iaer, 
Dwanc  die  minne  dese  twee, 
Dat  si  dogheden  menech  wee. 

95    Hi  reet,  soo  hi  ierst  mochte, 
Ten  clooster,  daer  hise  sochte. 
Hi  ghinc  zitten  voor  tfensterkijn 
Ende  soude  gheerne,  mocht  sijn, 
Sijn  lief  spreken  ende  sien. 

100     Niet  langhe  en  merde  si  na  dien ; 
Si  quam  ende  woudene  vanden 
Vor  tfensterkijn,  dat  met  yseren  banden 
Dwers  ende  lanx  was  bevlochten. 
Menech  werven  si  versochten, 

105     Daer  hi  sat  buten  ende  si  binnen, 
Bevaen  met  alsoo  starker  minnen. 
Si  saten  soo  een  langhe  stonde, 
Dat  ict  ghesegghen  niet  en  conde, 
Hoe  dicke  verwandelde  hare  blye. 

110     'Ay  mi,'  seitsi,  'aymie, 

Vercoren  lief,  mi  es  soo  wee, 
Sprect  ieghen  mi  een  wort  oft  twee, 

166-3  j< 


50  BEATKIJS 

Dat  mi  therte  conforteert ! 
Ic  ben,  die  troost  ane  u  begheert! 
115    Der  minnen  strael  stect  mi  int  herte, 
Dat  ic  doghe  grote  smerte. 
In  mach  nemmermeer  verhoghen, 
Lief,  ghi  en  hebbet  uut  ghetoghen  ! ' 

Hi  antworde  met  sinne: 

120     'Ghi  wet,  wel  lieve  vriendinne, 
Dat  wi  langhe  hebben  ghedragen 
Minne  al  onsen  daghen. 
Wi  en  hadden  nye  soo  vele  rusten, 
Dat  wi  ons  eens  ondercusten. 

125    Vrouwe  Venus,  die  godinne, 
Die  dit  brachte  in  onsen  sinne, 
Moete  God  onse  here  verdoemen, 
Dat  si  twee  soo  scone  bloemen 
Doet  vervaluen  ende  bederven. 

130     Constic  wel  ane  u  verwerven, 

Ende  ghi  dabijt  wout  nederleggen 
Ende  mi  enen  sekeren  tijt  seggen, 
Hoe  ic  u  ute  mochte  leiden, 
Ic  woude  riden  ende  ghereiden 

135     Goede  cleder  diere  van  wullen 

Ende  die  met  bonten  doen  vnllen: 
Mantel,  roc  ende  sercoot. 
In  begheve  u  te  ghere  noot. 
Met  u  willic  mi  aventueren 

140    Lief,  leet,  tsuete  metten  sueren. 
Nemt  te  pande  mijn  trouwe.' 
'Vercorne  vrient,'  sprac  die  ioncfrouwe, 
'  Die  willic  gherne  van  u  ontfaen 
Ende  met  u  soo  verre  gaen, 

145    Dat  niemen  en  sal  weten  in  dit  covent 
Werwaert  dat  wi  sijn  be  went. 
Van  tavont  over  .VIIJ.  nachte 
Comt  ende  nemt  mijns  wachte 
Daer  buten  inden  vergier, 
150     Onder  enen  eglentier. 

Wacht  daer  mijns,  ic  come  uut 


BEATRIJS  51 


Ende  wille  wesen  uwe  bruut, 
Te  varen  daer  ghi  begheert ; 
En  si  dat  mi  siecheit  deert 
1B6    Ocht  saken,  die  mi  sijn  te  swaer, 
Ic  come  sekerlike  daer, 
Ende  ic  begheert  van  u  sere, 
Dat  ghi  daer  comt,  lieve  ionchere.' 

Dit  gheloofde  elc  anderen. 
160    Hi  nam  orlof  ende  ghinc  wanderen 

Daer  sijn  rosside  ghesadelt  stoet. 

Hi  satter  op  metter  spoet 

Ende  reet  wech  sinen  telt 

Ter  stat  wert,  over  een  velt. 
166    Sijns  lieves  hi  niet  en  vergat. 

Sanders  daghes  ghinc  hi  in  die  stat ; 

Hi  cochte  blau  ende  scaerlaken, 

Daer  hi  af  dede  maken 

Mantele  ende  caproen  groot 
170    Ende  roc  ende  sorcoot 

Ende  na  recht  ghevoedert  wel. 

Niemen  en  sach  beter  vel 

Onder  vrouwen  cledere  draghen. 

Si  prysdent  alle  diet  saghen. 
175    Messe,  gordele  ende  almoniere 

Cochti  haer  goet  ende  diere ; 

Huven,  vingherline  van  goude 

Ende  chierheit  menechfoude. 

Om  al  die  chierheit  dede  hi  proeven, 
180    Die  eneger  bruut  soude  behoeven. 

Met  hem  nam  hi  .v*'.  pont 

Ende  voer  in  ere  avonstont 

Heymelike  buten  der  stede. 

Al  dat  scoonheide  voerdi  mede 
185    Wel  ghetorst  op  sijn  paert 

Ende  voer  alsoo  ten  cloostere  waert, 

Daer  si  seide,  inden  vergier, 

Onder  enen  eglent 

Hi  ghinc  sitten  neder  int  cruut, 
190    Tote  sijn  lief  soude  comen  uut. 

E  2 


52  BEATRIJS 

Van  hem  latic  nu  die  tale 
Ende  segghe  u  vander  seconder  smale. 
Vore  middernacht  lude  si  mettine ; 
Die  minne  dede  haer  grote  pine. 

195    Als  mettenen  waren  ghesongen 
Beide  van  ouden  ende  van  iongen 
Die  daer  waren  int  covent, 
Ende  si  weder  waren  ghewent 
Opten  dormter  al  ghemene, 

200     Bleef  si  inden  coor  allene 
Ende  si  sprac  haer  ghebede, 
Alsi  te  voren  dicke  dede. 
Si  knielde  voorden  outaer 
Ende  sprac  met  groten  vaer  : 

205     'Maria,  moeder,  soete  name, 
Nu  en  mach  minen  lichame 
Met  langher  in  dabijt  gheduren. 
Ghi  kint  wel  in  alien  uren 
Smenschen  herte  ende  sijn  wesen  ; 

210    Ic  hebbe  ghevast  ende  ghelesen 
Ende  ghenomen  discipline, 
Hets  al  om  niet  dat  ic  pine ; 
Minne  worpt  mi  onder  voet, 
Dat  ic  der  werelt  dienen  moet. 

215    Alsoo  waerlike  als  ghi,  here  lieve, 
Wort  ghehanghen  tusschen  .ij.  dieve 
Ende  aent  cruce  wort  gherecket, 
Ende  ghi  Lazaruse  verwecket, 
Daer  hi  lach  inden  grave  doot, 

220     Soe  moetti  kinnen  minen  noot 

Ende  mine  mesdaet  mi  vergheven ; 
Ic  moet  in  swaren  sonden  sneven.* 
Na  desen  ghinc  si  uten  core 
Teenen  beelde,  daer  si  vore 

225     Knielde  ende  sprac  hare  ghebede, 
Daer  Maria  stont  ter  stede. 
Si  riep :    *  Maria  ! '   onversaghet, 
*Ic  hebbe  u  nach  ende  dach  geclaghet 
Ontfermelike  mijn  vernoy 

230    Ende  mi  en  es  niet  te  bat  een  hoy. 


BEATKIJS  53 


Ic  werde  mijns  sins  te  male  quijt, 
Blivic  laugher  in  dit  abijt ! ' 
Die  covel  tooch  si  ute  al  daer 
Ende  leidse  op  onser  vrouwen  outaer. 

286    Doen  dede  si  ute  hare  scoen. 
Nu  hoort,  watsi  sal  doen  ! 
Die  slotele  vander  sacristien 
Hinc  si  voor  dat  beelde  Marian ; 
Ende  ic  segt  u  over  waar, 

2i0    Waer  omme  dat  sise  hinc  al  daer : 
Ofmense  te  priemtide  sochte, 
Dat  mense  best  daer  vinden  mochte. 
Hets  wel  recht  in  alder  tijt, 
Wie  vore  Marian  beelde  lijt, 

245    Dat  hi  sijn  oghen  derwaert  sla 
Ende  segge  'ave',  eer  hi  ga, 
'Ave  Maria':   daer  omme  si  ghedinct, 
Waer  omme  dat  si  die  slotel  daer  hinc. 

Nu  ghinc  si  danen  dorden  noot 
250     Met  enen  pels  al  bloot, 

Daer  si  een  dore  wiste, 

Die  si  ontsloot  met  liste, 

Ende  ghincker  heymelijc  uut, 

Stillekine  sender  gheluut. 
255     Inden  vergier  quam  si  met  vare. 

Di  iongelinc  wart  haers  gheware  ; 

Hi  seide:  'lief,  en  verveert  u  niet, 

Hets  u  vrient  dat  ghi  hier  siet.' 

Doen  si  beide  te  samen  quamen, 
260    Si  begonste  hare  te  seamen, 

Om  dat  si  in  enen  pels  stoet, 

Bloots  hooft  ende  barvoet. 

Doen  seidi :   '  wel  scone  lichame, 

U  soo  waren  bat  bequame 
265     Scone  ghewaden  ende  goede  cleder. 

Hebter  mi  om  niet  te  leder, 

Ic  salse  u  gheven  sciere/ 

Doe  ghinghen  si  onder  den  eglentiere 

Ende  alles,  dies  si  behoeft. 


54  BEATRIJS 

270     Des  gaf  hi  hare  ghenoech. 

Hi  gaf  haer  cleder  twee  paer, 

Blau  waest  dat  si  aen  dede  daer, 

Wei  ghescepen  int  ghevoech. 

Vriendelike  hi  op  haer  loech. 
276     Hi  seide  :    '  lief,  dit  hemelblau 

Staet  u  bat  dan  dede  dat  grau.' 

Twee  cousen  tooch  si  ane 

Ende  twee  scoen  cordewane 

Die  hare  vele  bat  stonden 
280    Dan  scoen  die  waren  ghebonden. 

Hoot  cleder  van  witter  ziden 

Gaf  hi  hare  te  dien  tiden, 

Die  si  op  haer  hooft  hinc. 

Doen  cussese  die  ionghelinc 
285    Vriendelike  aen  haren  mont. 

Hem  dochte,  daer  si  voor  hem  stont, 

Dat  die  dach  verclaerde. 

Haestelike  ghinc  hi  tsinen  paerde, 

Hi  settese  voor  hem  int  ghereide. 
290     Dus  voren  si  henen  beide, 

Soe  verre,  dat  began  te  daghen, 

Dat  si  hen  nyemen  volghen  en  saghen. 

Doen  begant  te  lichtene  int  oost. 

Si  seide :    *  God,  alder  werelt  troost, 
295     Nu  moeti  ons  bewaren, 

Ic  sie  den  dach  verclaren. 

Waric  met  u  niet  comen  uut, 

Ic  sonde  prime  hebben  gheluut, 

Als  ic  wilen  was  ghewone 
300    Inden  clooster  van  religione. 

Ic  ducht  mi  die  vaert  sal  rouwen  : 

Die  werelt  hout  soo  cleine  trouwe, 

Al  hebbic  mi  ghekeert  daeran ; 

Si  slacht  den  losen  coman, 
305    Die  vingherline  van  formine 

Vercoopt  voor  guldine.' 

*Ay,  wat  segdi,  suverlike, 
Ocht  ic  u  emmermeer  beswike, 


BEATEIJS  55 


Soo  moete  mi  God  scinden  ! 
310    Waer  dat  wi  ons  bewinden, 

In  scede  van  u  te  ghere  noot, 

Ons  en  scede  die  bitter  doot ! 

Hoe  mach  u  aen  mi  twien  ? 

Ghi  en  hebt  aen  mi  niet  versien, 
315    Dat  ic  u  fel  was  ofte  loos. 

Sint  dat  ic  u  ierst  vercoos, 

En  haddic  niet  in  minen  sinne 

Ghedaen  een  keyserinne. 

Op  dat  ic  haers  werdech  ware, 
820    Lief,  en  liete  u  niet  om  hare ! 

Des  moghedi  seker  wesen. 

Ik  vore  met  ons  ute  ghelesen 

.V**.  pont  wit  selverijn, 

Daer  seldi,  lief,  vrouwe  af  sijn. 
325    Al  varen  wie  in  vremde  lande. 

Wine  derven  verteren  ghene  panda 

Binnen  desen  seven  iaren.' 

Dus  quamen  si  den  telt  ghevaren 

Smorgens  aen  een  foreest, 
330     Daer  die  voghele  hadden  feest. 

Si  maecten  soo  groot  ghescal, 

Datment  hoorde  over  al. 

Elc  sane  na  der  naturen  sine. 

Daer  stonden  scone  bloemkine 
335     Op  dat  groene  velt  ontploken, 

Die  scone  waren  ende  suete  roken.     - 

Die  locht  was  claer  ende  scone. 

Daer  stonden  vele  rechte  bome, 

Die  ghelovert  waren  rike. 
340     Die  ionghelinc  sach  op  die  suverlike, 

Daer  hi  ghestade  minne  toe  droech. 

Hi  seide :    *  lief,  waert  u  ghevoech, 

Wi  souden  beeten  ende  bloemen  lesen, 

Het  dunct  mi  hier  scone  wesen. 
345    Laet  ons  spelen  der  minnen  spel.' 

'  Wat  segdi,'  sprac  si,  '  dorper  fel, 

Soudic  beeten  op  tfelt, 

Ghelijc  enen  wive  die  wint  ghelt 


56  BEATRIJS 

Dorperlijc  met  haren  lichame, 
350     Seker,  soo  haddic  cleine  scame ! 

Dit  en  ware  u  niet  ghesciet, 

Waerdi  van  dorpers  aerde  niet! 

Ic  mach  mi  bedinken  onsochte. 

Godsat  hebdi  diet  sochte ! 
355     Swighet  meer  deser  talen 

Ende  hoort  die  voghele  inden  dalen, 

Hoe  si  singhen  ende  hem  vervroyen. 

Die  tijt  sal  u  te  min  vernoyen, 

Alsic  bi  u  ben  al  naect 
360     Op  een  bedde  wel  ghemaect, 

Soo  doet  al  dat  u  ghenoecht 

Ende  dat  uwer  herten  voeght. 

Ic  hebs  in  mijn  herte  toren, 

Dat  ghijt  mi  heden  leit  te  voren.' 

365    Hi  seide:    'lief,  en  belghet  u  niet. 
Het  dede  Venus,  diet  mi  riet. 
God  geve  mi  scande  ende  plaghe, 
Ochtic[s]  u  emmermeer  ghewaghe.' 
Si  seide:  *ic  vergheeft  u  dan, 

370     Ghi  sijt  mijn  troost  voor  alle  man 
Die  leven  onder  den  trone. 
Al  levede  Absolon  die  scone 
Ende  ic  des  wel  seker  ware 
Met  hem  te  levene  .M.  iare 

375    In  weelden  ende  in  rusten, 
Ic  liets  mi  niet  ghecusten. 
Lief,  ic  hebbe  u  soo  vercoren, 
Men  mocht  mi  dat  niet  legghen  voren, 
Dat  ic  uwes  sonde  vergheten. 

380    Waric  in  hemelrike  gheseten 
Ende  ghi  hier  in  ertrike, 
Ic  quame  tot  u  sekerlike  ! 
Ay  God,  latet  onghewroken 
Dat  ic  duUijc  hebbe  ghesproken! 

385    Die  minste  bliscap  in  hemelrike 
En  es  hier  ghere  vrouden  ghelike ; 
Daer  es  die  minste  soo  volmaect, 


BEATKIJS  57 


Datter  zielen  niet  en  smaect 

Dan  Gode  te  minnen  sender  inde. 
390    Al  erdsche  dine  es  ellinde, 

Si  en  dooghet  niet  een  haer 

Jeghen  die  minste  die  es  daer. 

Diere  om  pinen  die  sijn  vroet, 

Al  eest  dat  ic  dolen  meet 
395    Ende  mi  te  groten  sonden  keren 

Dore  u,  lieve  scone  ionchere/ 

Dus  hadden  si  tale  ende  wedertale. 

Si  reden  berch  ende  dale. 

In  can  u  niet  ghesegghen  wel 
400    Wat  tusschen  hen  tween  ghevel. 

Si  voren  alsoo  voort, 

Tes  si  quamen  in  een  poort, 

Die  scone  stont  in  enen  dale. 

Daer  soo  bequaemt  hem  wale, 
405    Dat  siere  bleven  der  iaren  seven 

Ende  waren  in  verweenden  leven 

Met  ghenuechten  van  lichamen, 

Ende  wonnen  .ij.  kinder  tsamen. 

Daer,  na  den  seven  iaren, 
410     Alse  die  penninghen  verteert  waren, 

Moesten  si  teren  vanden  pande, 

Die  si  brachten  uten  lande. 

Cleder,  scoonheit  ende  paerde 

Vercochten  si  te  halver  warde 
415    Ende  brochtent  al  over  saen. 

Doen  en  wisten  si  wat  bestaen  ; 

Si  en  conste  ghenen  roc  spinnen, 

Daer  si  met  mochte  winnen. 

Die  tijt  wart  inden  lande  diere 
420     Van  spisen,  van  wine  ende  van  biere 

Ende  van  al  datmen  eten  mochte. 

Dies  hem  wart  te  moede  onsochte ; 

Si  waren  hem  liever  vele  doot, 

Dan  si  hadden  ghebeden  broot. 
425    Die  aermoede  maecte  een  ghesceet 

Tusschen  hem  beiden,  al  waest  hem  leet. 


58  BEATEIJS 

Aenden  man  ghebrac  dierste  trouwe ; 
Hi  lietse  daer  in  groten  rouwe 
Ende  voer  te  sinen  lande  weder. 
430     Si  en  sachen  met  oghen  nye  zeder. 
Daer  bleven  met  hare  ghinder 
Twee  uter  maten  scone  kinder. 

Si  sprac :  '  hets  mi  comen  toe, 
Dat  ic  duchte  spade  ende  vroe  ; 

435     Ic  ben  in  vele  doghens  bleven. 
Die  ghene  heeft  mi  begheven, 
Daer  ic  mi  trouwen  toe  verliet. 
Maria,  vrouwe,  oft  ghi  ghebiet, 
Bidt  vore  mi  ende  mine  .ij.  ionghere. 

440     Dat  wi  niet  en  sterven  van  honghere. 
Wat  salic  doen,  elendech  wijf! 
Ic  moot  beide,  ziele  ende  lijf, 
Bevlecken  met  sondeghen  daden. 
Maria,  vrouwe,  staet  mi  in  staden! 

445    Al  constic  enen  roc  spinnen, 
In  mochter  niet  met  winnen 
In  tween  weken  een  broot. 
Ic  moet  gaen  dorden  noot 
Buten  der  stat  op  tfelt 

450    Ende  winnen  met  minen  lichame  ghelt, 
Daer  ic  met  mach  copen  spise. 
In  mach  in  ghere  wise 
Mijn  kinder  niet  begheven.' 
Dus  ghinc  si  in  een  sondech  leven. 

455     Want  men  seit  ons  overwaer, 
Dat  si  langhe  seve  iaer 
Ghemene  wijf  ter  werelt  ghinc 
Ende  meneghe  sonde  ontfinc, 
Dat  haer  was  wel  onbequame, 

460     Die  si  dede  metten  lichame, 

Daer  si  cleine  ghenuechte  hadde  in; 
Al  dede  sijt  om  een  crane  ghewin, 
Daersi  haer  kinder  met  onthelt. 
Wat  holpt  al  vertelt 

433  MS.  soe 


BEATRIJS  69 


465     Die  scamelike  sonden  ende  die  zwaer, 

Daer  si  in  was  .XII I  J.  iaer ! 

Maer  emmer  en  lietsi  achter  niet, 

Hadsi  rouwe  oft  verdriet, 

Sine  las  alle  daghe  met  trouwen 
470    Die  seven  ghetiden  van  onser  vrouwen. 

Die  las  si  haer  te  loven  ende  teren, 

Dat  sise  moeste  bekeren 

Uten  sondeliken  daden, 

Daer  si  was  met  beladen 
475    Bi  ghetale  .XIIIJ.  iaer ; 

Dat  segghic  u  over  waer. 

Si  was  seven  iaer  metten  man, 

Die  .ij.  kindere  an  hare  wan, 

Diese  liet  in  ellinde, 
480     Daer  si  doghede  groot  meswinde. 

Dierste  .VIJ.  iaer  hebdi  gehoort ; 

Verstaet  hoe  si  levede  voort. 

Als  die  .XIIIJ.  iaer  waren  gedaen, 
Sinde  haer  God  int  herte  saen 

485     Berouwennesse  alsoo  groot, 

Dat  si  met  enen  swerde  al  bloot 
Liever  liete  haer  hoot  af  slaen, 
Dan  si  meer  sonden  hadde  ghedaen 
Met  haren  lichame,  alsi  plach. 

490    Si  weende  nacht  ende  dach, 

Dat  haer  oghen  selden  drogheden. 
Si  seide:   *  Maria,  die  Gode  soghede, 
Fonteyne  boven  alle  wiven, 
Laet  mi  inder  noot  niet  bliven ! 

495     Vrouwe,  ic  neme  u  torconden, 
Dat  mi  rouwen  mine  sonden 
Ende  sijn  mi  herde  leet. 
Der  es  soo  vele,  dat  ic  en  weet 
Waer  icse  dede  ocht  met  wien. 

600    Ay  lacen  !  wat  sal  mijns  ghescien  ! 
Ic  mach  wel  ieghen  dordeel  sorgen  — 
Doghen  Gods  sijn  mi  verborgen — y 
Daer  alle  sonden  selen  bliken, 


BEATKIJS 

Beide  van  armen  ende  van  riken, 

505     Ende  alle  mesdaet  sal  sijn  ghewroken, 
Daer  en  si  vore  biechte  af  ghesproken 
Ende  penitencie  ghedaen. 
Dat  wetic  wel,  sender  waen. 
Des  benic  in  groten  vare. 

510    Al  droghic  alle  daghe  een  hare, 

Ende   crooper  met  van  lande  te  lande 
Over  voete  ende  over  hande 
Wullen,  barvoet,  sender  scoen, 
Nochtan  en  constic  niet  ghedoen, 

515    Dat  ic  van  sonden  worde  vri, 
Maria,  vrouwe,  ghi  en  troost  mi, 
Fonteyne  boven  alle  doghet ! 
Ghi  hebt  den  meneghen  verhoghet, 
Alse  wel  Teophuluse  sceen; 

520    Hi  was  der  quaetster  sonderen  een 
Ende  haddem  den  duvel  op  ghegeven, 
Beide  ziele  ende  leven, 
Ende  was  worden  sijn  man ; 
Vrouwe,  ghi  verloosseten  nochtan. 

525    Al  benic  een  besondech  wijf 
Ende  een  onghestroost  keytijf. 
In  wat  leven  ic  noy[t]  was, 
Vrouwe,  ghedinct  dat  ic  las 
Tuwer  eren  een  ghebede ! 

530     Toont  aen  mi  u  ootmoedechede ! 
Ic  ben  ene  die  es  bedroevet 
Ende  uwer  hulpen  wel  behoevet ; 
Dies  maghic  mi  verbouden: 
En  bleef  hem  nye  onvergouden, 

535     Die  u  gruete,  maget  vrie, 

Alle  daghe  met  ere  ave  marie. 
Die  u  ghebet  gherne  lesen, 
Sie  mooghen  wel  seker  wesen, 
Dat  hem  daer  af  sal  comen  vrame. 

540    Vrouwe,  hets  u  soo  wel  bequame, 
Uut  vercorne  Gods  bruut. 
U  sone  sinde  u  een  saluut 
Te  Nazaret,  daer  hi  u  sochte. 


BEATRIJS  61 

Die  u  ene  bootscap  brochte, 
645     Die  nye  van  bode  was  ghehoort ; 

Daer  omme  sijn  u  die  selve  woort 

Soo  bequame  sender  wane, 

Dat  ghijs  wet  elken  danc, 

Die  u  gheerne  daer  mede  quet. 
550    Al  waer  hi  in  sonden  belet, 

Ghi  souten  te  ghenaden  bringhen 

Ende  voor  uwen  sone  verdinghen.' 

Dese  bedinghe  ende  dese  claghe 

Dreef  die  sondersse  alle  daghe. 
555     Si  nam  een  kint  in  elke  hant, 

Ende  ghincker  met  door  tlant, 

In  armoede,  van  stede  te  steden, 

Ende  levede  bider  beden. 

Soo  langhe  dolede  si  achter  dlant, 
560    Dat  si  den  clooster  weder  vant, 

Daer  si  hadde  gheweest  nonne, 

Ende  quam  daer  savons  na  der  sonne 

In  ere  weduwen  huus  spade, 

Daer  si  bat  herberghe  door  ghenade, 
665    Dat  si  daer  snachts  mochte  bliven. 

*Ic  mocht  u  qualijc  verdriven,' 

Sprac  die  weduwe,  *  met  uwen  kinderkinen. 

Mi  dunct  dat  si  moede  scinen. 

Ruust  u  ende  sit  neder. 
570     Ic  sal  u  deilen  weder 

Dat  mi  verleent  onse  here 

Door  siere  liever  moeder  ere/ 

Dus  bleef  si  met  haren  kinden 

Ende  sonde  gheerne  ondervinden, 
575     Hoet  inden  clooster  stoede. 

*Segt  mi,*  seitsi,   'vrouwe  goede, 

Es  dit  covint  van  ioffrouwen?' 

*Jaet,'  seitsi,  *bi  miere  trouwen. 

Dat  verweent  es  ende  rike ; 
580     Men  weet  niewer  sijns  ghelike. 

Die  nonnen  diere  abijt  in  draghen, 

In  hoorde  nye  ghewaghen 

Van  hen  gheen  gherochten 


62  BEATKIJS 

Dies  si  blame  hebben  mochten.' 

585    Die  daer  bi  haren  kinderen  sat, 
Si  seide  :    *  waer  bi  segdi  dat  ? 
Ic  hoorde  binnen  deser  weken 
Soo  vele  van  ere  nonnen  spreken; 
Alsic  verstoet  in  minen  sinne, 

590     Soo  was  si  hier  costerinne. 

Diet  mi  seide  hine  looch  niet: 
Hets  binnen  .XIIIJ.  iaren  ghesciet, 
Dat  si  uten  clooster  streec. 
Men  wiste  noyt,  waer  si  weec 

595     Oft  in  wat  lande  si  inde  nam.' 
Doen  wert  die  weduwe  gram 
Ende  seide  :   '  ghi  dunct  mi  reven ! 
Derre  talen  seldi  begheven 
Te  segghene  vander  costerinnen 

600     Oft  ghi  en  blijft  hier  niet  binnen ! 
Si  heeft  hier  costersse  ghesijn 
.XIIIJ.  iaer  den  termijn, 
Dat  men  haers  noyt  ghemessen  conde 
In  alden  tiden  ene  metten  stonde, 

605     Hen  si  dat  si  waer  onghesont. 
Hi  ware  erger  dan  een  hont, 
Diere  af  seide  el  dan  goet ; 
Si  draghet  soo  reynen  meet, 
Die  eneghe  nonne  draghen  mochte, 

610     Die  alle  die  cloosters  dore  sochte, 

Die  staen  tusschen  Elve  ende  der  Geronde, 
Ic  wane  men  niet  vinden  en  conde 
Neghene  die  gheesteliker  leeft ! ' 

Die  alsoo  langhe  hadde  ghesneeft 
615    Dese  tale  dochte  haer  wesen  wonder, 

Ende  seide :   '  vrouwe,  maect  mi  conder. 

Hoe  hiet  haer  moeder  ende  vader  ? ' 

Doe  noemesise  beide  gader. 

Doen  wiste  si  wel,  dat  si  haer  meende. 
620    Ay  God !    hoe  si  snachs  weende 
.    Heymelike  voor  haer  bedde ! 


BEATEIJS  63 


Si  seide:   *ic  en  hebbe  ander  wedde 
Dan  van  herten  groot  berouwe. 
Sijt  in  mijn  hulpe,  Maria,  vrouwe! 

625     Mijn  sonden  sijn  mi  soo  leet, 
Saghic  enen  hoven  heet, 
Die  in  groten  gloyen  stonde, 
Dat  die  vlamme  ghinghe  uten  monde, 
Ic  croper  in  met  vlite, 

630    Mochtic  mier  sonden  werden  quite. 
Here,  ghi  hebt  wanhope  verwaten, 
Daer  op  willic  mi  verlaten ! 
Ic  ben,  die  altoos  ghenade  hoopt, 
Al  eest  dat  mi  anxt  noopt 

635    Ende  mi  bringt  in  groten  vare. 
En  was  nye  soo  groten  sondare, 
Sint  dat  ghi  op  ertrike  quaemt 
Ende  menschelike  vorme  naemt 
Ende  ghi  aen  den  cruce  wout  sterven, 

640    Sone  lieti  den  sondare  niet  bederven ; 
Die  met  berouwenesse  socht  gnade, 
Hi  vantse,  al  quam  hi  spade, 
Alst  wel  openbaer  scheen 
Den  enen  sondare  vanden  tween, 

645    Die  tuwer  rechter  siden  hinc. 
Dats  ons  een  troostelijc  dine, 
Dat  ghine  ontfinc[t]  onbescouden. 
Goet  berou  mach  als  ghewouden ; 
Dat  maghic  merken  an  desen. 

650    Ghi  seit :    *  vrient,  du  salt  wesen 
Met  mi  heden  in  mijn  rike, 
Dat  segghic  u  ghewaerlike.' 
Noch,  here,  waest  openbare, 
Dat  Gisemast,  die  mordenare, 

655    Ten  lesten  om  ghenade  bat. 
Hi  gaf  u  weder  gout  no  scat, 
Dan  hem  berouden  sine  sonden. 
U  ontfermecheit  en  es  niet  te  gronden 
Niet  meer,  dan  men  mach 
660    Die  zee  uut  sceppen  op  enen  dach 
Ende  droghen  al  toten  gronde. 


64  BEATRIJS 

Dus  was  nye  soo  grote  sonde, 
Vrouwe,   u  ghenaden  en  gaen  boven. 
Hoe  soudic  dan  sijn  verscoven 
665     Van  uwer  ontfermecheit, 

Ocht  mi  mijn  sonden  sijn  soo  leit ! ' 

Daer  si  lach  in  dit  ghebede, 
Quam  een  vaec  in  al  haer  lede 
Ende  si  wart  in  slape  sochte. 

670     In  enen  vysioen  haer  dochte, 
Hoe  een  stemme  aan  haer  riep, 
Daer  si  lach  ende  sliep: 
'Mensche,  du  heves  soo  langhe  gecarmt, 
Dat  Maria  dijns  ontfarmt, 

675     Want  si  heeft  u  verbeden. 

Gaet  inden  clooster  met  haestecheden : 
Ghi  vint  die  doren  open  wide, 
Daer  ghi  uut  ginges  ten  selven  tide 
Met  uwen  lieve,  den  ionghelinc, 

680     Die  u  inder  noot  af  ghinc. 
Al  dijn  abijt  vinstu  weder 
Ligghen  opten  outaer  neder ; 
Wile,  covele  ende  scoen 
Mooghedi  coenlijc  ane  doen ; 

685     Des  danct  hooghelike  Marien : 
Die  slotele  vander  sacristiSn, 
Die  ghi  voor  tbeelde  hinct 
Snachs,  doen  ghi  uut  ghinct. 
Die  heeft  si  soo  doen  bewaren, 

690    Datmen  binnen  .XIIIJ.  iaren 
Uwes  nye  en  ghemiste, 
Soo  dat  yemen  daer  af  wiste. 
Maria  es  soo  wel  u  vrient: 
Si  heeft  altoos  voor  u  ghedient 

695    Min  no  meer  na  dijn  ghelike. 

Dat  heeft  de  vrouwe  van  hemelrike, 
Sonderse,  door  u  ghedaen ! 
Si  heet  u  inden  clooster  gaen. 
Ghi  en  vint  nyeman  op  u  bedde. 

700     Hets  van  Gode,  dat  ic  u  quedde ! ' 


BEATEIJS  65 


Na  desen  en  waest  niet  lane, 
Dat  si  uut  haren  slape  ontspranc. 
Si  seide:    'God,  gheweldechere. 
En  ghehinct  den  duvel  nemmermere, 

705     Dat  hi  mi  bringhe  in  mere  verdriet, 
Dan  mi  nu  es  ghesciet ! 
Ochtic  nu  inden  clooster  ghinghe 
Ende  men  mi  over  dieveghe  vinghe, 
Soo  waric  noch  meer  ghescent, 

710     Dan  doen  ic  ierst  rumde  covent. 
Ic  mane  u,  God  die  goede, 
Dor  uwen  pretiosen  bloede, 
Dat  uut  uwer  ziden  liep, 
Ocht  die  stemme,  die  aen  mi  riep, 

715    Hier  es  comen  te  minen  baten, 
Dat  sijs  niet  en  moete  laten, 
Si  en  come  anderwerf  tot  hare 
Ende  derde  werven  openbare, 
Soo  dat  ic  mach  sonder  waen 

720    Weder  in  minen  clooster  gaen. 
Ic  wilre  om  benedien 
Ende  loven  altoos  Marien  ! ' 

Sanders  snachts,  moghedi  horen, 
Quam  haer  een  stemme  te  voren, 

725     Die  op  haer  riep  ende  seide: 

*  Mensche,  du  maecs  te  langhe  beide ! 
Ganc  weder  in  dinen  clooster, 
God  sal  wesen  dijn  trooster. 
Doet  dat  Maria  u  ontbiet ! 

730     Ic  ben  haer  bode,  en  twivels  niet.' 
Nu  heefsise  anderwerf  vernomen 
Die  stemme  tote  haer  comen 
Ende  hietse  inden  cloister  gaen  ; 
Nochtan  en  dorst  sijs  niet  bestaen. 

735     Der  derder  nacht  verbeyt  si  noch 
Ende  seide:    'eest  elfs  ghedroch, 
Dat  mi  comt  te  voren, 
Soo  maghic  cortelike  scoren 
Des  duvels  ghewelt  ende  sine  cracht 

6«.8  F 


66  BEATEIJS 

740    Ende  ocht  hire  comt  te  nacht, 
Here,  soo  maecten  soo  confuus, 
Dat  hi  vare  uten  huus, 
Dat  hi  mi  niet  en  moete  scaden. 
Maria,  nu  staet  mi  in  staden, 

745    Die  ene  stemme  ane  mi  sint, 
Ende  hiet  mi  gaen  int  covint ; 
Ic  mane  u,  vrouwe,  bi  uwen  kinde, 
Dat  ghise  mi  derdewerven  wilt  sinden.' 

Doen  waecte  si  den  derden  nacht. 

750    Een  stemme  quam  van  gods  cracht 
Met  enen  over  groten  lichte 
Ende  seide :   '  hets  bi  onrechte, 
Dat  ghi  niet  en  doet  dat  ic  u  hiet, 
Want  u  Maria  bi  mi  ontbiet. 

755    Ghi  moocht  beiden  te  lane. 

Gaet  inden  clooster,  sonder  wane, 

Ghi  vint  die  doren  op  ende  wide  ontdaen, 

Daer  ghi  wilt,  moghedi  gaen. 

U  abijt  vindi  weder 

760    Ligghende  opten  outaer  neder.' 
Als  die  stemme  dit  hadde  gheseit, 
Mochte  die  zondersse  die  daer  leit, 
Die  claerheit  metten  oghen  wel  sien ; 
Si  seide:    *nu  en  darf  mi  niet  twien, 

765    Dese  stemme  comt  van  Gode, 

Ende  es  der  maghet  Marian  bode. 
Dat  wetic  nu  sonder  hone. 
Si  comt  met  lichte  soo  scone: 
Nu  en  willies  niet  laten, 

770    Ic  wille  mi  inden  clooster  maken, 
Ic  saelt  ooc  doen  in  goeder  trouwen 
Opten  troost  van  onser  vrouwen, 
Ende  wille  mijn  kinder  beide  gader 
Bevelen  Gode  onsen  vader, 

776     Hi  salse  wel  bewaren.* 

Doen  tooch  si  ute  al  sonder  sparen 
Haer  cleder,  daer  sise  met  decte 
762  MS,  En  mochte 


BEATRIJS  67 


Heymelike,  dat  sise  niet  en  wecte. 
Si  cussese  beide  aen  haren  mont. 

780     Si  seide:   'kinder,  blijft  ghesont. 
Op  den  troost  van  onser  vrouwen 
Latic  u  hier  in  goeder  trouwen, 
En  hadde  mi  Maria  niet  verbeden, 
Ic  en  hadde  u  niet  begheven 

786    Om  al  tgoet,  dat  Eome  heeft  binnen.* 
Hoort,  wes  si  sal  beghinnen, 

Nu  gaet  si  met  groten  weene 

Ten  clooster  waert,  moeder  eene. 

Doen  si  quam  inden  vergiere, 
790    Vant  si  die  dore  ontsloten  sciere. 

Si  ghincker  in  sonder  wane: 

*  Maria,  hebbes  danc, 

Ic  ben  comen  binnen  mure; 

God  gheve  mi  goede  aventure ! ' 
795    Waer  si  quam,  vant  si  die  dore 

Al  wide  open  ieghen  hore. 

In  die  kerke  si  doe  trac ; 

Heymelike  si  doe  sprac: 

'God  here,  ic  bidde  u  met  vlite, 
800    Hulpt  mi  weder  in  minen  abite, 

Dat  ic  over  .XIIIJ.  iaer 

Liet  ligghen  op  onser  vrouwen  outaer, 

Snachs,  doen  ic  danen  sciet ! ' 

Dit  en  es  gheloghen  niet, 
805     Ic  segt  u  sonder  ghile : 

Scone,  covele  ende  wile 

Vant  si  ter  selver  stede  weder, 

Daer  sijt  hadde  gheleit  neder. 

Si  traect  an  haestelike 
810     Ende  seide:    'God  van  hemelrike 

Ende  Maria,  maghet  fijn, 

Ghebenedijt  moetti  sijn ! 

Ghi  sijt  aire  doghet  bloeme! 

In  uwen  reine  magedoeme 
816    Droeghedi  een  kint  sonder  wee, 
783  MS.  Ende 

f2 


68  BEATRIJS 

Dat  here  sal  bliven  emmermee  ; 
Ghi  sijt  een  uut  vercoren  werde, 
U  kint  maecte  hemel  ende  erde. 
Deze  ghewelt  comt  u  van  Gode 

820    Ende  staet  altoos  tuwen  ghebode. 
Den  here,  die  ons  breeder 
Moghedi  ghebieden  als  moeder 
Ende  hi  u  heten  Keve  dochter. 
Hier  omme  levic  vele  te  sochter. 

825    Wie  aen  u  soect  ghenade, 
Hi  vintse,  al  comt  hi  spade. 
U  hulpe  die  es  alte  groot ; 
Al  hebbic  vernoy  ende  noot, 
Hets  bi  u  ghewandelt  soo, 

830     Dat  io  nu  mach  wesen  vroo. 
Met  rechte  maghic  u  benedien  ! ' 
Die  slotele  vander  sacristien 
Sach  si  hanghen,  in  ware  dine, 
Vor  Marien,  daer  sise  hinc. 

835    Die  slotele  hinc  si  aen  hare 

Ende  ghinc  ten  core,  daersi  clare 
Lampten  sach  berren  in  alien  hoeken. 
Daer  na  ghinc  si  ten  boeken 
Ende  leide  elc  op  sine  stede, 

840     Alsi  dicke  te  voren  dede, 

Ende  si  bat  der  maghet  Marien, 
Dat  sise  van  evele  moeste  vrien 
Ende  haer  kinder,  die  si  liet 
Ter  weduwen  huus  in  zwaer  verdriet. 

845    Binnen  dien  was  die  nacht  ghegaen, 
Dat  dorloy  begonste  te  slaen, 
Daermen  middernacht  bi  kinde. 
Si  nam  cloczeel  biden  inde 
Ende  luude  metten  so  wel  te  tiden, 

860    Dat  sijt  hoorden  in  alien  ziden. 
Die  boven  opten  dormter  laghen, 
Die  quam[en]  alle  sender  traghen 
Vanden  dormter  ghemene. 
Sine  wisten  hier  af  groot  no  clone. 
852  MS.  quam 


BEATKIJS  69 


866    Si  bleef  inden  clooster  haren  tijt, 
Sender  lachter  ende  verwijt: 
Maria  hadde  ghedient  voor  hare, 
Ghelijc  oft  sijt  selve  ware. 
iJus  was  die  sonderse  bekeert, 

860    Maria  te  love,  die  men  eert, 
Der  maghet  van  hemelrike. 
Die  altoos  ghetrouwelike 
Haren  vrient  staet  in  staden, 
Aki  in  node  sijn  verladen. 

865     Dese  ioffrouwe,  daer  ic  af  las, 
Es  nonne  alsi  te  voren  was. 
Nu  en  willic  vergheten  niet 
Haer  twee  kindere,  die  si  liet 
Ter  weduwen  huus  in  groter  noot. 

870     Si  en  hadden  ghelt  noch  broot. 
In  can  u  niet  vergronden, 
Doen  si  haer  moeder  niet  en  vonden, 
Wat  groter  rouwe  datsi  dreven. 
Die  weduwe  ghincker  sitten  neven: 

876     Si  hadder  op  ontfermenisse. 

Si  seide:    4c  wille  toter  abdisse 
Gaen  met  desen  .ij.  kind  en. 
God  sal  hare  int  herte  sinden, 
Dat  si  hen  goet  sal  doen/ 

880     Si  deden  ane  cleder  ende  scoen, 
Si  ghincker  met  in  covent; 
Si  seide:    'vrouwe,  nu  bekent 
Den  noot  van  desen  tween  wesen : 
Die  moeder  heefse  met  vresen 

886     Te  nacht  in  mijn  huus  g[h]elaten 
Ende  es  ghegaen  hare  straten, 
Ic  en  weet,  west  noch  oost. 
Dus  sijn  die  kinder  onghetroost. 
Ic  hulpe  hen  gheerne,  wistic  hoe/ 

880    De  abdisse  spracker  toe: 

*Houtse  wel,  ic  saelt  u  lonen, 
Dat  ghijs  u  niet  en  selt  becronen, 
Na  dat  si  u  sijn  ghelaten. 


70  BEATRIJS 

Men  gheve  hen  der  caritaten 
896    Elcs  daghes,  om  Gode. 

Sint  hier  daghelijcs  enen  bode, 

Die  hen  drincken  hale  ende  eten. 

Gheberst  hen  yet,  laet  mi  we  ten/ 

Die  weduwe  was  vroo, 
900    Dat  haer  comen  was  alsoo. 

Si  nam  die  kinder  met  hare 

Ende  hadder  toe  goede  ware. 

Die  moeder,  diese  hadde  ghesoghet 

Ende  pine  daerom  ghedooghet, 
905     Haer  was  wel  te  moede, 

Doen  sise  wiste  in  goeder  hoede, 

Haer  kinder,  die  si  begaf 

In  groter  noot  ende  ghinc  af. 

Sine  hadde  vaer  no  hinder 
910    Voort  meer  om  hare  kinder. 

Si  leide  vort  een  heylech  leven ; 

Menech  suchten  ende  beven 

Hadsi  nacht  ende  dach, 

Want  haer  die  rouwe  int  herte  lach 
915     Van  haren  quaden  son  den, 

Di  si  niet  en  dorste  vermonden 

Ghenen  mensche,  no  ontdecken, 

Noo  in  dichten  ooc  vertrecken. 

Hier  na  quam  op  enen  dach 
920    Een  abt,  diese  te  visenteerne  plach 
Eenwerven  binnen  den  iare, 
Om  te  vernemen  oft  daer  ware 
Enech  lachterlike  gherochte, 
Daersi  blame  af  hebben  mochte[n]. 
925     Sdaghes  als  hire  comen  was, 
Lach  die  sonderse  ende  las 
Inden  coor  haer  ghebet. 
In  groter  twivelingen  met. 
Die  duvel  becorese  metter  scame, 
980    Dat  si  haer  sondelike  blame 

Vore  den  abt  niet  en  soude  bringhen. 
923  MS.  gheruchte 


BEATRIJS  71 


Alsi  lach  inder  bedinghen, 

Sach  si,  hoe  dat  neven  haer  leet 

Een  ionghelinc,  met  witten  ghecleet ; 
936    Hi  droech  in  sinen  arm  al  bloot 

Een  kint,  dat  dochte  haer  doot. 

Die  ionghelinc  warp  op  ende  neder 

Enen  appel  ende  vinken  weder 

Vor  tkint,  ende  maecte  spel. 
940     Dit  versach  die  nonne  wel, 

Daersi  in  haer  ghebede  lach. 

Si  seide :    *vrient,  oft  wesen  mach, 

Ende  of  ghi  comen  sijt  van  Gode, 

Soo  manic  u  bi  sine  ghebode, 
945     Dat  ghi  mi  segt  ende  niet  en  heelt, 

>Waerom  ghi  voor  dat  kint  speelt 

Metten  sconen  appel  root, 

Ende  het  leet  in  uwen  arm  doot? 

U  spel  en  helpt  hem  niet  een  haer.' 
950     'Seker,  nonne,  ghi  segt  waer: 

En  weet  niet  van  minen  spele 

Weder  luttel  no  vele, 

Hets  doot,  en  hoort  no  en  siet. 

Al  des  ghelike  en  weet  God  niet, 
965    Dat  ghi  leest  ende  vast : 

Dat  en  helpt  u  niet  een  bast; 

Hets  al  verloren  pine, 

Dat  ghi  neemt  discipline: 

Ghi  sijt  in  sonden  soo  versmoort, 
960     Dat  God  u  beden  niet  en  hoort 

Boven  in  sijn  rike. 

Ic  rade  u:    haestelike 

Gaet  ten  abt,  uwen  vader, 

Ende  verteelt  hem  algader 
965     U  sonden,  al  sonder  lieghen. 

Laet  u  den  duvel  niet  bedrieghen. 

Die  abt  sal  u  absolveren 

Vanden  sonden,  die  u  deren. 

Eest,  dat  ghise  niet  wilt  spreken, 
970     God  salse  zwaerlike  an  u  wreken!' 

Die  ionghelinc  ghinc  ute  haer  oghen: 


72  BEATKIJS 

Hine  wilde  haer  nemmeer  vertoghen. 

Dat  hi  seide,  heeft  si  verstaen. 

Smorghens  ghinc  si  alsoo  saen 
975     Ten  abt  ende  bat,  dat  hi  hoorde 

Haer  biechte  van  worde  te  worde. 

Die  abt  was  vroet  van  sinne. 

Hi  seide  :    '  dochter,  lieve  minne, 

Des  en  willic  laten  niet, 
980     Bepeinst  u  wel  ende  besiet 

Volcomelijc  van  uwen  sonden.' 

Ende  si  ghinc  ten  selven  stonden 

Den  heyleghen  abt  sitten  neven 

Ende  ontdecten  hem  al  haer  leven, 
985    Ende  haer  vite  van  beghinne : 

Hoe  si  met  ere  duh-e  minne 

Becort  was  soo  uter  maten, 

Dat  si  moeste  ligghen  laten 

Haer  abijt  met  groten  vare 
990    Eens  snachts  op  onser  vrouwen  outare, 

Ende  rumede  den  clooster  met  enen  man, 

Die  twee  kindere  aen  hare  wan. 

Al  dat  haer  ye  was  ghesciet, 

Dies  ne  liet  si  achter  niet ; 
995     Wat  si  wiste  in  haer  herte  gront, 

Maecte  si  den  abt  al  cont. 

Doen  si  ghebiecht  hadde  algader, 

Sprac  dabt,  die  heyleghe  vader : 

*  Dochter,  ic  sal  u  absolveren 
1000    Vanden  sonden,  die  u  deren, 

Die  ghi  mi  nu  hebt  ghelijt. 

Ghelooft  ende  ghebenedijt 

Moot  die  moeder  Gods  wesen ! ' 

Hi  leide  haer  op  thooft  met  desen 
1005     Die  hant  ende  gaf  haar  perdoen. 

Hi  seide:   Mc  sal  in  een  sermoen 

U  biechte  openbare  seggen 

Ende  die  soo  wiselike  beleggen, 

Dat  ghi  ende  u  kinder  mede 
1010    Nemmermeer,  te  ghere  stede, 

Ghenen  lachter  en  selt  ghecrigen. 


BEATRIJS  73 


Het  ware  onrecht,  soudement  swigeii, 
Die  scone  miracle,  die  ons  here 
Dede  door  siere  moeder  ere. 
1015     Ic  saelt  orconden  over  al. 
Ic  hope,  datter  noch  bi  sal 
Menech  sondare  bekeren 
Ende  onser  liever  vrouwen  eren. 

Hi  deet  verstaen  den  covende, 
1020    Eer  hi  thuus  weder  wende. 

Hoe  ere  nonnen  was  ghesciet ; 

Maer  sine  wisten  niet, 

Wie  sie  was,  het  bleef  verholen. 

Die  abt  voer  Gode  volen. 
1025     Der  nonnen  kinder  nam  hi  beide 

Ende  vorese  in  sijn  gheleide. 

Grau  abijt  dedi  hen  an 

Ende  si  worden  twee  goede  man. 

Haer  moeder  hiet  Beatrijs. 
1030     Loof  Gode  ende  prijs 

Ende  Maria,  die  Gode  soghede, 

Ende  dese  scone  miracle  toghede ! 

Si  halp  haer  uut  aire  noot. 

Nu  bidden  wi  alle,  cleine  ende  groot, 
1035     Die  dese  miracle  horen  lesen, 

Dat  Maria  moot  wesen 

Ons  vorsprake  int  soete  dal, 
1038     Daer  God  die  werelt  doemen  sal. 

Amen. 


NOTES 

The  Manuscript.  The  Beatrijs  is  preserved  in  a  manuscript  of  the 
Royal  Library  at  the  Hague,  which  also  contains  transcripts  of  the 
Dietsche  Doctrinael  by  an  unknown  translator,  and  Jacob  van  Maerlant's 
HeimlicheU  der  Heimlicheden.  The  manuscript  dates  from  1374,  but  our 
poem  is  doubtless  a  good  half-century  older.  Of  the  poet  nothing  is 
known  except  that  he  must  have  been  a  native  of  Brabant.  (Cf.  §§  13, 15, 
21  note.) 

The  Legend.  He  seems  to  have  borrowed  part  of  his  story  from  the 
Lihri  Octo  Miraculorum,  written  in  1225  by  Caesarius  of  Heisterbach  (ed. 
Aloys  Meister,  pp.  138-40).  But  after  1.  552  his  version  contains 
elements  that  do  not  occur  in  that  of  Caesarius.  The  episode,  e.  g.,  of  the 
repentant  nun's  entertainment  at  the  widow's  house  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  convent  is  not  told  by  the  latter.  The  incident  is  no  invention  of 
the  Dutch  poet.  It  has  a  parallel  in  a  Latin  version  of  the  story  con- 
tained in  the  Cod.  Lat.  2777  of  the  '  Hofbibliothek '  at  Darmstadt,  and 
recurs  in  other  Latin  and  Old  French  redactions.  The  poet,  as  he  tells 
us  (1.  14),  had  the  story  from  hearsay,  and  'breeder  Ghijsbrecht ',  his 
authority,  may  have  blended  some  of  the  different  versions  he  had  found 
in  his  books.  The  legend  of  the  repentant  sacristine  enjoyed  great  popu- 
larity in  the  late  Middle  Ages.  An  exhaustive  bibliography  is  given  by 
J.  Bolte  as  an  appendix  to  an  article  by  P.  Toldo,  Die  Sakristanin,  in  the 
Zeitschrift  des  Vereins  fur  Volkskunde,  1905.  Cf.  also  J.  van  der  Elst, 
*  Bijdrage  tot  de  Geschiedenis  der  Legende  van  Beatrijs,'  Tijdschrift  voor 
Nederlandsche  Taal-  en  Letterkunde,  vol.  xxxii,  pp.  51  ff. 

Editions.  The  Middle  Dutch  poem  has  been  edited  by  Jonckbloet  in 
1841  and  1859.  Both  editions  are  out  of  print.  C.  G.  Kaakebeen  supplied 
the  want  of  a  good  edition  by  a  faithful  reprint  of  the  manuscript  pub- 
lished in  1902,  second  impression  1910,  as  No.  2  of  the  series  Van  alle 
Tijden.  A  magnificent  edition  de  luxe  was  brought  out  in  1901  by  the 
Antwerp  publisher  Buschman,  with  illustrations  by  Ch.  Doudelet. 

English  Translations.  This  illustrated  edition  appeared  also  in 
English  translation  by  A.  W.  Sanders  van  Loo.  Five  years  earlier  another 
English  rendering  of  the  Middle  Dutch  poem  had  been  published  in  The 
Pageant  (1896)  under  the  title  of '  The  Tale  of  a  Nun  '.  The  latest  English 
version  is  by  an  American  scholar,  Harold  de  Wolf  Fuller,  whose  archaic 
and  naive  language  is  admirably  suited  to  render  the  beautiful  simplicity 
of  the  original  (Cambridge,  Harvard  Co-operative  Society,  1909). 


NOTES  75 

2.  ict<ic(e)t,  §  70. 
8.  teren  <  t{e)  eren,  §  29. 
16.  vant<vant  {e)i,  §  28. 

in  die  hoeke  sijn,  *  in  his  books '.    On  the  post-positive  adjective 
cf.  §  66. 
19.  hovesche.    Cf.  §  65. 

25.  dochte,  pret.  of  doghen^.  'That  is  a  theme  which  would  not  be 
suitable.* 

26.  van  wat  amhochte,  gen.  plur.     Cf.  §  77,  note. 

35.  ornament,  the  accessories  or  furnishings  of  the  Church  and  its 
worship.     Cf.  O.E.D.,  s.v.  ornament,  1  b. 

39.  achter  lande,  '  across  country  '.  Cf.  the  obsolete  or  dialectal  use  of 
Engl,  after,  O.E.D.,  s.v.  B  3. 

45.  *  whether  he  likes  it  or  not.'  Lieft  (MS.)  is  a  dittograph  antici- 
pating the  t  of  ofte.  A  similar  case  is  onghestroost  in  1.  526,  and  perhaps 
Jioven  heet  in  1.  626  (cf.  §  41,  note  2). 

47-8.  '  whether  to  speak  or  to  be  silent  (to  her)  from  whom  he  hopes 
to  obtain  reward.' 

49.  voet  may  be  either  singular  or  plural  (§  52).  The  metaphor  is 
probably  derived  from  the  victor  putting  his  foot  on  the  neck  of  his 
defeated  opponent,  in  which  case  voet  would  be  singular  as  in  the  Engl. 
phrase  underfoot  (O.E.D.,  s.  v.  33). 

54-7.  *  One  also  finds  such  faithful  people  that  love  makes  them  share 
whatever  they  have,  be  it  great  or  little.' 

59.  in  constu  =  ic  ne  conste  u. 

68.  Depending  on  die  duvel  niet  en  cesseert,  *  the  devil  does  not  cease 
doing  what  is  in  his  power  to  tempt  man.'    Cf.  O.E.D.,  s.v.  hut,  22. 

73.  ghenaden  is  plural.     Cf.  1.  663. 

trooste,  pret.  subj.  <  troostte  <  troostede.    §§  28,  96. 

77.  '  from  whom  (§  78)  nothing  is  hidden.' 

81.  hoeter  =  hoe  (e)t  er.    Cf.  Glossary,  s.  v.  er. 

91.  hi  haestem  =  hi  haeste  (pret.)  em  (refl.).    §  72. 

95.  so  hi  ierst  mochte, '  as  soon  as  he  could.' 

98.  mocht  sijn  =  mocht  {e)t  sijn,  '  if  it  could  be.' 

99.  lief  =  '  sweetheart '.    Cf.  O.E.D.,  s.  v.  lief,  4  b. 

100.  na  dien  (d.s.  of  dat),  '  after  that.' 
104.  si  versochten,  pret.    §  96. 

118.  '  Unless  you  pull  it  (i.  e.  der  minnen  strael)  out.'  hebbet  =  hebbet  {e)t. 

122.  onsen  daghen.  A  survival  of  the  use  of  the  dative  case  as  an 
adjunct  of  time.    Cf.  OE.  hwUum. 

123.  {soo  vele)  rusten,  a  partitive  genitive  sing.    §  79  g. 
131.  ende,  '  if.'    Cf.  O.E.D.,  s.  v.  and,  C. 

148.  mijns,  g.s.  of  *c.     Cf.  1.  151. 

150.  The  eglantine  is  an  emblem  of  love. 

154.  en  si  dat,  unless. 


76  BEATRIJS 

192.  On  small  as  an  epithet  denoting  personal  beauty  cf.  O.E.D., 
s,  V.  1  c. 

202.  alsi  =  als  si. 

206.  minen  lichame.  This  use  of  the  oblique  case  (dat.  or  ace.  sg.  ?)  for 
the  nom.  is  very  common  in  MDu.     Cf.  Stoett,  St/ntaxis,  §  151. 

218.  vertvecket  <  verwecked{e)t^  with  unusual  syncope  of  the  second 
syllable  of  the  ending  -edet.    Cf.  §  30. 

223.  na  desen  (d.s.  of  dit\  '  after  this.'     Cf.  na  dien,  1.  100. 

234.  leidse  <  hide  se.     §  95. 

238.  Manen,  g.s. 

247-8.  *  She  remembers  that,  (and  that  is)  why  she  hung  the  keys  there.' 

248.  Verdam  {Mnl.  Wdh.,  ii.  1045,  s.v.  *^g6?enc)  suggests  hinct  as  a  better 
rime  to  ghedinct.  Hinct  is  the  3rd  pers.  pres.  ind.  of  hinghen  or  henghen, 
the  causative  of  hanghen.    Cf.  ghehinghen. 

258.  dat  refers  to  het.  If  vrient  were  the  antecedent,  the  relative  pro- 
noun should  be  dien. 

262.  hloots  hooft.  The  regular  form  is  hloots  hoofts,  an  adverbial  genitive 
of  circumstance.  The  loss  of  the  -s  is  due  either  to  haplography,  the 
preceding  word  also  ending  in  -ts,  or  to  the  analogy  of  the  following 
harvoet. 

266.  ieder,  comp.  of  leet.     '  Do  not  love  me  the  less  for  it '  (er  om). 

280.  Scoen  die  waren  ghebonden  =  '  sandals  *. 

291.  dat  <  dat  {e)t. 

295.  moeti  <  moet  (j)i.    §  71. 

303.  '  although  I  have  turned  towards  it  (the  world).' 

312.  *  unless  bitter  death  part  us.' 

317-18.  Literally :  *  I  should  not  have  put  an  empress  into  my  heart,'  '  I 
should  not  have  set  my  heart  on  an  empress.' 

320.  en  liete  u  niet  om  hare.  The  pronominal  subject  is  often  omitted 
when  it  may  be  supplied  from  the  context  or  has  been  mentioned  in  a 
previous  sentence,  principal  or  subordinate.  Instances  of  the  same  usage 
in  OE.  and  ME.  are  given  by  Kellner,  Historical  Outlines  of  English 
Syntax,  §§  268  ff. 

342.  waert  =  ware  {e)t. 

351.  dit  en  ware  u  niet  ghesciet,  'you  would  not  have  done  this.'  Ghe- 
scien  with  the  dative  of  a  person  often  expresses  activity  on  the  person's 
part.     Cf.  Verdam,  Mnl,  Wdh.,  s.  v.  4. 

388.  datter  <  dat  der.     niet '  nothing  '. 

393.  diere  —  die  er. 

422.  hem  wart  onsochte.  Cf.  OE.  him  unsofte  wear/?,  Sweet,  Stud.  Diet., 
s.  V.  unsofte. 

423.  si  waren  hem  liever  vele  doot,  *  they  would  much  rather  be  dead.' 
Hem  is  reflexive.    Cf.  ME.  me  is  lever,  O.E.D.,  s.v.  lief. 

434.  duchte,  pret. !    Cf.  §  96,  note. 

435.  in  vele  doghens,  'in  much  suffering.'    Cf.  §  79  g. 


NOTES  77 

464.  icat  holpt  al  vetieltf  '  what  would  it  avail  to  tell,'  lit.  '  what  would 
it  avail  though  (being)  told.'    Al  has  concessive  force. 

465.  Cf.  §  66. 

471.  teren  <  {t)e  eren. 

475-82.  A  clumsy  insertion  of  later  date  :  11.  481-2  are  contradicted 
by  1.  483.  Cf.  M.  de  Vries,  Tijdschrift  voor  Nederl.  Taal-  en  Letterhundey 
vi.  159. 

491-2.  On  the  rhyme  cf.  §  46. 

495.  torconden  <  t{e)  orconden  (sb.  d.s. !). 

498.  f?er  =  'ofthem'.     §  79  g. 

500.  wat  sal  mijns  ghescien,  *  what  will  become  of  me  ?  '  This  construc- 
tion of  ghescien  with  a  genitive  occurs  only  in  sentences  introduced  by 
wat.    Cf.  Verdam,  Mnl.  Wdh.,  ii.  1602. 

501.  doi-deel,  *  the  last  judgement.' 

506.  *  unless  first  {vore)  confession  be  made  of  them  {daer  af) '. 
516.  ghi  en  troost  mi,  *  unless  you  comfort  me.' 

526.  Cf.  note  to  1.  45. 

527.  '  In  what  sort  of  life  I  ever  {noy{t\)  was.'  The  use  of  the  negative 
seems  to  be  due  to  the  crossing  of  two  ideas :  *  what  sort  of  life  (is  there) 
that  I  never  led  ? '  and  '  what  sort  of  life  I  ever  led  '. 

545.  Die  nye  van  bode  was  ghehoort.  The  omission  of  the  indefinite 
article  after  nye  '  never  '  offers  an  exact  parallel  to  the  English  usage. 

578.  jaet  =ja  {e)t  ('it ',  i.  e.  'the  convent ').  Ja  and  neen  are  followed 
in  MDu.  by  a  personal  pronoun  referring  to  the  subject  of  the  question 
asked. 

595.  '  or  in  what  country  she  finally  settled,'  lit.  '  attained  the  end ' 
(scil.  '  of  her  wanderings  '). 

616.  conder,  comparative  of  cont. 

630.  mier  =  mire.    §  7. 

636.  Soo  groten  sondare.    Cf.  §  64,  note. 

647.  MS.  ontfinc.  The  error  was  evidently  caused  by  the  similarity  of 
sound  with  dine  in  the  preceding  line. 

648.  als,  g.s.  of  al  sb.     Cf.  §  79  f. 

656-7.  *  he  gave  Thee  neither  gold  nor  treasure  except  that  he  repented 
his  sins.'     His  repentance  was  his  only  requital. 

663.  u  ghenaden  en  gaen  boven,  '  but  Thy  mercy  surpasses  it.' 

674.  Maria  is  accusative. 

685.  danct  is  imperative. 

703.  gheweldechere.    Cf.  §  41. 

710.  fnimde,  an  unusual  spelling  for  rtmmde.  The  spelling  with 
single  It  is  probably  imitated  from  the  infinitive  rumen,  vnth  single  n  in 
open  syllable.    Cf.  §  8. 

716-17.  '  May  she  not  fail  to  come  again  to  me.'  Hare  instead  of  me 
(cf.  1.  714,  die  aen  mi  riep)  affords  an  instance  of  a  very  common  feature 
of  MDu.  syntax,  the  blending  of  direct  and  indirect  speech.    The  present 


78  BEATRIJS 

instance,  however,  is  in  so  far  unusual,  as  the  more  natural  change  is 
the  transition  from  the  indirect  to  the  direct  statement.  Cf.  Kellner, 
Outlines,  §  108. 

733.  The  subject  ofhietis  omitted  as  it  can  be  easily  supplied  from  the 
preceding  line  (die  stemme).    Cf.  note  to  I.  320. 

740.  hire  =  hi  (die  duvel)  er  [in  dat  huus). 

788.  moeder  eene,  lit.  '  as  lonely  as  at  birth,'  a  similar  compound  as 
MDu.  moedernaect,  Engl.  '  mother-naked  '  (cf.  O.E.D.,  s.  v.).  Cf.  Chaucer, 
C.  T.  A.  1633,  Troil.  iv.  298,  '  allone  as  he  (I)  was  born.' 

814.  reine.     Cf.  §  46. 

821.  Cf.  §  28,  note. 

827.  alte  groot,  very  (lit.  all  too)  great. 

873.  wat  groter  rouwe.     Cf.  §  77,  note. 

880.  si  (she)  deden  <  dede  (he)n. 

886.  hare  straten,  an  adverbial  genitive  case. 

900.  dat  (<  dat  {e)t)  haer  comen  teas  alsoo,  'that  things  turned  out  for 
her  in  this  way,'  lit.  '  that  it  had  come  to  her  thus.' 

951.  en  weet  niet.    The  subject  (het)  is  omitted.     Cf.  note  to  1.  320. 

966.  den  duvel,  dative !    '  Do  not  allow  the  devil  to  deceive  you.' 

980-1.  'Consideryourself  well  and  examine  yourself  minutely  as  regards 
your  sins.'  Verdam  {Mnl.  Wdb.,  i.  852)  adopts  Jonckbloet's  change  of 
besiet  into  heliet  (confess).  But  the  reading  of  the  MS.  conveys  quite  as 
good  a  meaning. 

999.  met  desen,  '  therewith.'    Cf.  note  to  1.  223. 

1018.  onser  lievervrouwen  is  object  to  even.  Feminine  nouns  of  relation- 
ship, titles  and  proper  names  often  occur  in  the  genitive  case  as  object 
of  a  transitive  verb.  Cf.  Stoett,  Syntaxis,  §  164,  where,  however,  an 
explanation  is  not  offered. 


GLOSSARY 


aan  =  ane. 

abdi'sse,  /.  abbess,  §  6. 

abij't,  nm.  habit,  dress  of  a  religious 
order,  §  6. 

absolve'ren,  tvkv.  absolve,  §  6. 

abt,  m.  abbot,  §§  5,  6,  28. 

achte,  eight  (OE.  eahta),  §  80. 

achter,  (1)  prep.  w.  d.,  a.  behind, 
across,  all  over.  (2)  adv.  behind, 
§44. 

a'chterlaten,  VII.  omit,  neglect. 

aen  =  ane,  §  31. 

ae'rmoede  =  armoede. 

aert(d),  m.  nature,  character  (OE. 
eard,  '  native  soil '),  §  16. 

af,  adv.  of,  off,  from  (OE.  of,  def-), 
§§  6,  31. 

a'f-gaen,  VII.  w.  d.  forsake. 

a'f-slaen,  VI.  cut  off. 

al,  (1)  adj.  all,  entire.  (2)  n.  every- 
thing, all ;  mp.  alle,  all.  (3)  adv. 
entirely  (often  used  as  an  exple- 
tive, without  a  distinct  meaning, 
before  adjj.  and  advv.),  §  79  f. 

al,  co7tj.  although. 

alga'der,  adv.  altogether. 

alle'ne,  adv.  alone,  §  35. 

almonie're,  alms-purse,  §  6. 

als,  adv.  (orig.  g.s.  of  al)  entirely. 
niet  als  (1.  59)  not  at  all. 

alB(e),  conj.  as,  when  (OE.  eal{l)swd). 

a'lsi  =  als  si. 

also(o),  adv.  so  (OE.  eal{l)swd). 

altoos,  adv.  always. 

a'mbocht,  n.  office,  service  (OE. 
amhiht)y  §  82. 

an  =  ane. 

ander,  (1)  adj.  other,  aanders 
daghes,  snachts,  the  following 
day,  night.  (2)  sh.  the  other,  elc 
anderen,  each  other,  §§  79  b,  80. 

anderwerf(v),  adv.  another  time, 
again. 

ane,  aan,  aen,  an,  (1)  prep.  w.  d.,  a. 
on,  from,  to,  at;  place:  aent 
cpuce  (1.  217) ;   source,   origin : 


begheren   (1.   114),  verwerven 

(1.   130),   soeken  (1.  825)   ane; 

motion :    roepen   ane   (1.   671), 

comen  ane  (1.  329).    (2)  adv.  on, 

in,  §§  6,  31. 
a'ne-doen,  aen-,  anv.  don,  put  on. 
a'ne-tien,  aen-,  II.  put  on. 
a'ntworden,  tvkv.  answer  (OE.  and- 

ivyrdan),  §§  6,  9  note,  13,  36. 
anxt,/.  anxiety,  fear,  §  40. 
appel,  w.  apple,  §  33. 
arm,  m.  arm,  §  15. 
arm,  adj.  poor  (OE.  earm),  §  15. 
a'rmoede,  aerm-,/.  poverty,  §§  16, 

32. 
a've,  hail ! 

ave  mari'e,/.  an  Ave  Mary, 
aventu're,/.  chance,  luck,  fortune, 

§6. 
aventue'ren,  wkv.  risk. 
a*vont(d),  mf.  evening  (OE.  mfen) ; 

tavont,    to-night ;    savons,    at 

night,  §§  32,  38. 
a'vontstont(d),  /.   evening  hour, 

§6. 
ay,  ah  !  alas ! 

B 

bant(d),  m.  band,  bar. 

ba'rvoet,  adv.  bare-footed  (OE. 
hderfot). 

bast,  m.  bast,  bark,  rind  (OE.  hdest). 

bat,  adv.  better,  more  (OE.  h^t), 
§§  12  note,  68. 

hB>t{di),pret.  of  bidden  (OE.  hded). 

bate,/,  profit,  benefit. 

be-,  §  6. 

bedde,  n.  bed,  §§  12,  50. 

bede,  /.  prayer,  beggary  (OE. 
hedu). 

beden,  wkv.  pray. 

bede'nken,  -dinken,  m^Ajv.  consider, 
bear  in  mind,  refl.  be  in  a  certain 
state  of  mind:  ic  mach  mi 
bedinken  onsochte  (1.  353),  I 
have  reason  to  be  depressed  (OE. 
be/?gncean),  §  18. 


80 


BEATEIJS 


bede-rven.   III.  perish   (OE.  (ge)- 

deorfan),  §  87. 
be-dinghe,  /.  prayer,  §  32. 
bedrieghen,  II.  deceive  (OS.  pret. 
bedrog^    Sweet,    Student's   Diet.), 
§§  23,  86. 
bedroevet(d),  adj.   afflicted    (OE. 

gedrefed). 
beelde,  n.  image,  statue,  §  10. 
beeten  =  beten. 
beghe'ren,   wkv.  desire  (cogn.  w. 

OE.  giernan),  §  12. 
beghe'ven,  V.  w.a.  or  g.  forsake, 

abandon,  leave  off. 
beghe'ven,  adj.  (orig.  x>P-  of  be- 

gheven  refl.),  recluse. 
beghi'ii,  n.  beginning. 
beghinnen.  III.  begin,  §  87. 
behoeven,  tvkv.  lo.  g.  need,  require  ; 

imp.  IV.  d.     of    person:     to     be 

necessary  (1.  180),  (OE.  hehojian). 
beide,/.  delay. 
beide,  both,  §  23. 
beiden,  tvkv.  intrans.  wait,  §  23. 
bake,/,  brook  (OE.  b^ce),  §§  12,  50. 
beke'nnen,  wkv.  understand,  learn, 
beke'ren,  tvkv.  trans,  convert ;  in- 
trans. be  converted, 
becomen,  IV.  tv.  d.  please, 
becoren,  tvkv.  tempt, 
becronen,  tvkv.  refl.  tv.g.  complain 

of. 
beladen,  VI.  burden,  §  28. 
bele'gghen,    tvkv.  plan,  arrange, 

§§  28,  93.  / 

bele'tten,  tvkv.  hinder,  encumber, 

§§  28,  93. 
belghen.  III.  re/,  be  angry  (OE. 

beJgan),  §  87. 
ben,    1  ps.pres.ind.    of   sijn,   am, 

§106. 
benedren,  tvkv.  bless,  praise,  §  6. 
bepeinsen,  tvkv.  refl.  consider,  §  36. 
bequame,  adj.  suitable,  becoming, 

agreeable. 
berch(g),  m.  mountain,  hill   (OE. 

beorg). 
berouwe,  berou,  n.  repentance, 
berouwen,  t4)kv.  intrans.  tv.  d.  cause 

repentance. 
berren.  III.  and  tvkv.  burn,  §§  46, 

47, 87.  ^^ 

besien,  V.  examine. 
besondech(g),  adj.  sinful. 
best,  sup.  of  goet,  §  68. 


bestaen,  VI.  w.  g.  undertake, 
beswiken,  I.  betray,  forsake  (OE. 

beswJcati),  §  85. 
be(e)ten,  tvkv.  lit.  to  cause  to  bite, 
esp.  to  give  food  to  a  hoi-se  when 
upon  a  journey,  hence  dismount 
(OE.  bdetan,  ON.  beita,  whence 
ModE.  bait),  §  23. 

beter,  compar.  of  goet,  §§  12,  68. 

bevaen,  VII.  seize  (OE.  befon). 

beve'len,  IV.  recommend,  trust  to 
the  care  of  (OE.  befeolan),  §§  41, 
87,  88. 

be'ven,  tvkv.  tremble  (OE.  hiflan), 
§  10. 

bevlechten.  III.  cover  with  plait- 
ing (OE.  *fleohtan,  flohten-fote) . 

bevlecken,  tvkv.  stain,  contami- 
nate. 

bewaren,  tvkv.  watch  over,  guard, 
keep  (OE.  bewarian). 

bewenden,  bew^inden,  tvkv.  refl. 
turn,  go  (OE.  beivpidan),  §  18. 

bi,  prep),  tv.  d.  and  a.  Place  and 
motion:  by  (nearness,  1.  585),  to  ; 
time :  bi  nachte,  bi  daghe,  bi 
wilen,  sometimes  ;  instrument, 
cause :  bi  rade,  by  advice  ;  ac- 
cording to :  bi  ghetale  ;  in  forms 
of  adjuration :  bi  mire  trouwen. 

bidden.  V.  pray  (OE.  biddan),  §  89. 

biechte,/.  confession,  §  24. 

biechten,  tvkv.  confess. 

bier,  n.  beer,  §  23. 

binden,  III.  bind,  §  87. 

binnen,  (1)  adv.  within,  inside ; 
(2)  prep.  tv.  d.  and  g.  within. 

bitter,  adj.  bitter,  §  33. 

blame,/,  blame. 

blau,  (1)  adj.  blue;  (2)  n.  blue 
clothes  (OE.  bliliv,  Erf.  Gl.),  §  25. 

bleven,  pp.  of  bliven,  §  83. 

blide,  adj.  joyful  (OE.  blij?e). 

blye,  /.  colour,  esp.  complexion 
(OE.  bleo,  bleoh). 

bliken,  I.  appear,  be  laid  bare 
(OE.  blican),  §  85. 

bliscap,/.  joy. 

bliven,  I.  remain  (OE.  belifan), 
§§  10,  28,  81,  83,  85. 

bloeme,/.  flower. 

bloemkijn,  n.  little  flower. 

bloet(d),  n.  blood,  §  8. 

bloot,  (1)  adj.  uncovered,  bare: 
bloots      hooft,     bare-headed. 


i 


GLOSSARY 


81 


(2)  adv.  often  preceded  by  al, 
simply,  solely  (OEMeat),  §§  8,  23. 

bode,  m.  messenger  (OE.  boda). 

boec,  mn.  book,  §21. 

bont,  n.  fur. 

boom,  m.  tree  (OE.  beam),  §  23. 

bootscap,  /.  message  (OE.  {ge)bod' 
scipe). 

boven,  (1)  adv.  above ;  (2)  prep, 
w.  d.  and  a.  above,  over  (OE.  bu- 
fan),  §  29. 

bo'vengaen,  VII.  surpass. 

brief(v),  m.  letter,  §§  5,  20. 

bringhen,  wkv,  bring,  §§  83,  97. 

broeder,  m.  brother,  §  54. 

broot(d),  n.  bread,  loaf,  §  23. 

bruut(d),/.  bride,  §§21,  51. 

buten,  (1)  adv.  without,  outside ; 
(2)  2)rep.  w.  d.  and  a.  without,  out- 
side, §§21,  29. 

C(§42) 

cesse-ren,  whv.  cease,  §  42. 
chierheit(d),/.  ornament,  §  5. 


dach(g),  m.  day  (OE.  ddeg),  §  50. 

dade,  pret.  subj.  of  doen,  §  105. 

daer,  (1)  adv.  place,  there  ;  time, 
then  (1.  409) ;  (2)  relative  adv. 
where ;  (3)  in  combination  with 
advv.  and  prepp.  as  a  substitute 
for  a  dem.  or  relat.  pron.  preceded 
by  a  prep. :  dem.  -af  (1. 12),  -an(e) 
(11. 86,  303),  -na  (1.  838),  -om(me) 
(11. 247,  546,  904) ;  re^a^.-af  (11. 18, 
48,  168,  506),  -in  (1.  461),  -met 
(11. 418,  451,  474),  -toe  (11. 83, 341, 
437),  -vore  (1.  224)  (OE./ser). 

daet(d),/.  deed. 

daghelijcs,  adv.  daily. 

daghen,  wkv.  dawn  (OE.  dagian). 

dal,  n.  dale,  valley  (OE.  ddel). 

dan,  adv.  then,  than  (OE./oM(ne)), 
§46. 

danen,  adv.  thence  (OE.  panon). 

danc,  m.  thought,  will,  thanks. 

danken,  xvkv.  thank. 

darf(v),  3  s.pres.  of  dorven. 

dat,  (1)  dem.  pron.  n.  that ;  (2)  def. 
art.  n.  the ;  (3)  relat.  pron.  which  ; 
including  its  antecedent :  that 
which,  doet  dat  Maria  u  ont- 
biet  (1.  729),  §§  28,  74. 


dat,  (1)  conj.  that,  so  that  (11.  116, 
214),  because  (1.  128).  Intro- 
ducing an  optative  clause :  dat 
sijs  niet  en  moete  laten  (1.  716). 
(2)  often  used  in  combination 
with  prepp.  and  advv. :  om  dat, 
because  (1.  261) ;  op  dat,  if  (1. 
319) ;  waer  dat,  wherever  (1.310); 
waer  omme  dat,  why  (11.  240, 
248) ;  werwaert  dat,  whither 
(1.  146). 

d(e)  =  die,  §  74. 

dede,  pret.  of  doen,  §  105. 

deilen,  whv.  deal,  divide,  share, 
§23. 

decken,  wkv.  cover  (OE.  p^ccan). 

derde,  third,  §§  15,  47,  80. 

derdewerven,  adv.  a  third  time. 

deren,  wkv.  injure  (OE.  dorian), 
§12. 

derven  =  dorven. 

de*r'waert(d),  adv.  thither. 

des,  gs.  of  die,  dat. 

dese,  dem.  pron.  sb.  and  adj.  this 
(0E.>5),  §  75. 

dicht,  n.  writing. 

dichten,  wkv.  compose  in  language 
(OE.  dihtan),  §  5. 

die,  d(e),  (1)  dem.  pron.  mf.  that ; 
(2)  def. art.)  {^)  relat. pron.  who, 
that,  including  its  antecedent, 
he,  she  who  :  die  daer  bi  haren 
kinderen  sat  (1.  585),  §§  21,  29, 
74,  78. 

dief(v),  m.  thief,  criminal,  §  23. 

diene  =  die  (e)ne. 

dienen,  wkv.  w.  d.  serve  (cogn.  w. 
OE.  peowian),  §  23. 

diere,  adj.  dear,  §  23. 

dierste  =  d(e)  ierste. 

dies,  adv.  (orig.  gsn.  of  dat),  there- 
fore, thereby ;  conj.  whereby. 

die'veghe,  /.  female  thief,  §  32. 

dijn,  poss.  pron.  thy,  §  73. 

dicke,  adv.  often. 

dinc(g),  nf.  thing ;  in  ware  dine, 
in  truth  (1.  833),  §  40. 

discipli'ne,  f.  mortification  of  the 
flesh  by  penance. 

dit,  dem.  pron.  n.  this,  §  75. 

dochte,  pret.  of  dunken  and  of 
doghen^,  §§  97,  100. 

dochter,  /.  daughter,  §  54. 

doe,  doen,  (1)  adv.  then ;  (2)  conj. 
when,  §  46. 


82 


BEATRIJS 


doemen,  whv.  deem,  judge. 
doen,  anv.  do,  cause,  complete,  §  105. 
doghen^,  whv.  endure  (OE.  gedle- 

gan\  §§  U,  23. 
doghen'^,  jyretpres.  avail,  be  good 

(OE.  deah),  §  100. 
do(o)ghet(d),/.  virtue  (OE.  dugub), 

§§  14,  28,  46. 
dolen,  wki).  err. 
door  =  dor(e). 
doot(d)i,  ^,  (jeath  (OE.  deap),  §§  23, 

42. 
doot(d)S  adj.  dead  (OE.  dead),  §§  23, 

42. 
dor(e),    door,   prep.  w.  d.    and    a. 

through,  for  the  sake  of,  because 

of ;  door  ghenade,  for  God's  sake 

(OE./wr;^),  §31. 
dore,/.  door,  ^§10,  14. 
dormter,  nm.  dormitory,  §  6. 
dorper,  m.  villager,  clown,  lout, 
dorperlijc,  adv.  basely. 
dLOWQiHy  pret.  pres.  dare,  §  101. 
^LOTsreD.,  pret.  pres.  need  iO^.pearf), 

§101. 
draghen,  VI.  wear,  carry  (OE.  dra- 

gan),  §  90. 
drin(c)ken,  n.  drink,  §§  38  note,  87. 
driven,  I.  drive,  pursue,  practise, 

do  ;  claghe  — ,  complain,  wail ; 

rouwe  — ,  mourn,  §  85. 
droghen,    wkv.  intr.    become    dry 

(1. 491) ;  trans,  make  dry  (1.  661), 

§23. 
6.u,pers.pron.  thou,  |§  70,  71. 
duchten,  wJev.  fear,  §  22. 
dul,  adj.  foolish,  §  13  note  1. 
dullije,  adv.  foolishly. 
dunken,  wJcv.  seem  (OE.  byncan), 

§§  18,  97. 
dus,  adv.  thus,  so,  similarly. 
dusent(d),  thousand,  §  80. 
duvel,  m.  devil,  §§  5,  23  note  1. 
dwanc(g),  pret.  of  dwinghen. 
dwers,  adv.  athwart,  transversely 

{O^.pweores), 
dwinghen,  III.  force,  compel,  §  87. 

B 

een,  (1)  num.  one :  der  quaetster 
sonderen  een,  one  of  the  most 
wicked  sinners  (1.  520).  (2)  indef. 
pron.  some  one :  ic  ben  ene  die 
es  bedroevet,  I  am  one  who  is 


afflicted  (1.  531).     (3)  indef.  aH. 
a(n),  §§  23,  65,  79  a,  80. 
eens,  adv.  (orig.  gs.  of  een),  once 

(OE.  dnes),  §  79. 
eenwerven,  adv.  once. 
eer,  adv.  conj.  before,  ere  (OE.  der), 

§23. 
eest  =  es  et,  §  11. 
eglentie'r,  m.  eglantine,  §  6. 
el,  n.  anything  else,  §  12. 
ele*ndech(g),  adj.  miserable, 
e'lfsghedroch, n.  elves'  deceit,  §  12. 
elc,  si.  adj.  each  (OE.  dele),  §§  22, 

79  c. 
elli'nde,  nf.  misery  (OE.  el(e)lende), 

§§  18,  58. 
emmer,  adv.  evermore,  §  22. 
emmerniee*(r),  adv.  evermore. 
en  =  ne. 

ende,  inde,  n.  end,  §§  12,  18. 
ende,  conj.  and,  if  (OE.  §nd). 
-en(e),  -ne,  pers.pron.encUt.  him 

(Goth,  ina),  §§  70,  72._ 
enech(g),  adj.  any  (OE.aem^),  §79c. 
ent  =  ende  (e)t,  §  28. 
er,  -re,  adv.  there  (1.  740).    Used 
especially  in  combination  with 
prepp.  and  advv. :  -af  (11. 40, 607), 
-bi  (1.  1016),  -in  (1.  581),  -met 
(11.  446,  511),  -na  (1.  81),  -neven 
(1.  874),  -om  (11.  266,  393,  721), 
-op  (1.  162),  -toe  (11.  890,  902), 
-uut  (1.  253)  (orig.   a  pron.  gp. 
Goth,  ize,  §  47). 
erch(g),  adj.  bad  (OE.  earg),  §  15. 
erde,/.  earth  (OE.  eorpe). 
erdsch,  adj.  earthly,  §  37. 
ere^,  /.  honour ;  Marien  teren,  in 

honour  of  Mary  (OE.  dr),  §  23. 
ere^  =  eenre,  gdsf.  of  een,  §§  46, 

79. 
eren,  wkv.  honour  (OE.  drian). 
e'rtrike,  n.  earth   (OE.  eorp-rlce), 

§6. 
es,  3  p.s.  pres.  ind.  of  sijn. 
et,  t,  pers.  pron.  n.  it. 
etenS  V.  eat  (OE.  etan),  §  89. 
etenS  n.  food, 
evel,  n.  evil,  §  14. 

F  (§  42) 

feest,/.  feast. 

fel,  adj.  fell,  fierce. 

fy n,  adj.  fine,  excellent.  Of  persons : 


GLOSSARY 


consummate  in  virtue  (chiefly  as 
rhyme-word,  as  in  ME.,  see 
O.  E.D.,  s.v.Jine,  4  a). 

fonteyne,/.  fountain,  §  6. 

foree'st,  n.  forest,  §  6. 

formjj'n,  formi'ne  (?),  tinsel,  §  6. 

G  (§  45) 

gader,  adv.  together  (OE.   to-gce- 

d{e)re). 
gaen,  ganghen,  VII.  go  (OE.  gdn), 

§§  91,  92. 
gaf,  pret.  of  gheven. 
ganghen  =  gaen. 
ganc,  imper.  of  gaen. 
ghe-,  §§  6,  83. 
ghebe'de,  nf.  prayer,  §  12. 
ghebersten.  III.  fail,  be  wanting 

(OE.  berstan). 
ghebe*t(d),  n.  prayer  (OE.  gebed). 
ghebieden,    II.    command,    wish 

{0'^.  gebeodan),  §§  23,  86. 
ghebot(d),  M.  command  (OE.^e&o<?), 
ghebreken,  IV.  fail,  to  be  wanting, 

§88. 
ghedaghet(d),  adj.  aged,  §  28. 
ghedane,/.  appearance, 
ghedenken,  -dinken,  whv.  think, 

remember  (OE.  gepfncan),  §§  18, 

97. 
ghedichte,  n.  poem  (OE.  gediht). 
ghedoen,  anv.  cause,  bring  about 

{O'E.gedon). 
gheduren,  wTcv.  endure, 
gheen,  aphetized  form  of  negheen, 

not  any. 
gheerne  =  gheme. 
gheestelike,  adv.  spiritually  (OE. 

gdstltce). 
ghehinghen,  whv.  allow,  §  18. 
ghecrighen,  I.  obtain,  §  85. 
ghecusten,  wkv.  refi.  w.  g.  be  satis- 
fied with,  §§  13,  93. 
ghelelde,  n.  company,  §  23. 
ghelijc,  ghelike^,  adv.  like ;  ghe- 

lijc  oft,  as  if  (1.  858) ;   al  des 

ghelike,  in  just  the  same  way 

(1.  954)  (OE.  gelice). 
ghelike^  adj.  similar,  equal  (OE. 

gelic). 
ghelike',  mf.  equal,  match, 
ghelike*,  n.  likeness, 
gheliken,  I.  resemble,  §  85  note. 
gheloven,  wkv.  promise,  §  36. 


ghelovert(d),    adj.  covered    with 

leafage. 
ghelt(d),  n.  money  (OE.  gield). 
ghelu(u)c,  n.  luck,  §  13. 
gheluut(d),  n/.  noise  (OE.  gehlyd). 
ghemeen,    adj.    common,    public 

(OE.  gemdene),  §  23. 
ghemene,  adv.  together,  §  23. 
ghemissen,  -messen,  wkv.  miss. 
ghenade,  gnade,  /.  mercy ;  door 

ghenade  (1.  564),  for  God's  sake, 

§28. 
ghene,    dem.pron.    that,    yonder. 

Often  preceded  by  die  when  a 

relative  clause  follows   (1.  436) 

(OE.^.on),§§48,  76. 
ghenoech(g),   adv.    enough    (OE. 


ghenoeghen,  wkv.  satisfy,  please. 

ghenuechte,  /.  satisfaction,  plea- 
sure, §  22  note. 

gheraken,  wkv.  hit  (OE.  racian). 

ghere,  gdsf.  of  gheen,  ghene, 
§§  46,  76. 

ghereide,  n.  gear,  esp.  saddle  (OE. 
gerdd),  §  23. 

ghereiden,  ivkv.  prepare  (OE.  gerde- 
dan),  §§  23,  28. 

gherne,  gheerne, «(? v.  with  pleasure 
(OE.  geome),  §  16. 

gherochte,  n.  rumour,  §§  22,  44. 

ghescal,  n.  sound,  clamour  (cf.  OE. 
sciellan,  sound). 

ghesceet(d),  n.  separation  (OE. 
gescdd),  §  23. 

ghescepen,  pp.  of  sceppen. 

ghescien,  wkv.  happen  (OE.  sceon), 
§24. 

ghesegghen,  wkv.  narrate,  enu- 
merate. 

ghesont(d),  adj.  sound  in  health 
(OE.  gesund),  §  9. 

ghestade,  adj.  constant. 

ghetal,  n.  number ;  bi  ghetale,  to 
the  number  of,  exactly  (OE. 
getdel). 

ghetide,  n.  time,  hour,  esp.  an  event 
recurring  at  regular  intervals. 
Die  seven  ghetiden  van  onser 
vrouwen,  the  seven  prayers  ap- 
pointed to  be  said  at  the  so-called 
canonical  hours. 

ghetoghen,  p|9.  of  tien,  §  43. 

ghetrouwe,  adj.  faithful  (OE.  ^e- 
treowe),  §  26. 


g2 


84 


BEATKIJS 


ghetrouwelike,  adv.  faithfully, 
ghevallen,  VII.  happen,  §§  91,  92. 
gheve'l,  pret.  of  ghevallen,  §  92. 
gheven,  V.  give  (OE.  giefan),  §  89. 
ghevoech(g)^   n.   propriety;   int 
ghevoech,  properly  (1.  273)  (OE. 

gefog)' 

glievoecli(g)'^,  adj.  suitable,  agree- 
able. 

ghewaerlike,  adv.  faithfully. 

gliewaet(d),  ghewade,  n.  dress, 
garment  (OE.  gewdede). 

ghewaghen,  wkv.  w.a.  or  g.  men- 
tion, §  90. 

gheware,  adj.  w.  g.  aware  (cf.  OE. 
wder). 

gheweldecli(g),  adj.  mighty,  power- 
ful. 

gheweldechere  =  gheweldech 
here,  §  41. 

ghewelt(d),  nmf.  power  (OE.  ge- 
weald)j  §  12. 

ghewin,  n.  gain  (OE.  getvinn). 

ghewone,  adj.  accustomed  (OE. 
getvuna),  §  10. 

ghewouden,  VII.  w,  a.  or  g.  to  have 
control  over  (OE.  wealdan),  §§17, 

ghi,  'ifpers.pron.  you,  §§48,  70, 71. 
ghifte,/.  gift,  §  44. 
ghile,/.  guile,  deceit, 
ghinder,  adv.  yonder,  §  48. 
ghinghen,  ginG,pret.  of  gaen,  §  92. 
gloyen,  wkv.  blaze.      Used   as  a 

noun  :  in  groten  gloyen  (1.  627), 

§25. 
gnade  =  ghenade. 
god,  m.  god,  §§  36,  51. 
godi'nne,  /.  goddess  (OE.  gyden), 

§6. 
godsat,  m.  God's  hate,  §  41. 
goet(d),  (1)  adj.  good.   (2)  n.  goods, 

property,  §  68. 
gordel,  mn.  girdle,  §  13. 
gout(d),  n.  gold. 
graf(v),  n.  grave  (OE.  grdef). 
gram,  adj.  angry  (OE.  gram). 
grau,  adj.  grey  (OE.  gr^eg),  §  25. 
groene,  adj.  green, 
gronden,  wkv.  fathom. 
gront(d),  m.  gi'ound,  bottom,  §  9. 
groot,  adj.  great ;  groot  no  clene, 

nothing  whatever  (1.  854) ;  groot 

oft  clene,  whatever  it  be  (1.  55), 

§§  23,  63,  68. 


grueten,  wkv.  greet,  §  21. 
gu-ldyn,  adj.  golden  (OE.  gylden), 
§§  13, 17,  32. 


haer^,  n.  hair ;  niet  een  haer,  not 

a  bit  (11.  391,  949). 
haer^  hare,  dsf.  of  3  vers.  pron. 

her,  §  70. 
h&er^^  poss.  pron.  fs.  and  mfnp.  her, 

their,  §  73. 
haestechede, /.  haste,  §  41. 
haestelike,  adv.  hastily,  quickly, 
haesten,  wkv.  refl.  hurry,  hasten. 
halen,  wkv.  fetch  (cogn.  w.  OE.  ge- 

holian,  obtain). 
half,  adj.  half, 
hanghen,  haen,  VII.  trans.,  intr. 

hang,  §§  91,  92. 
hant(d),/.  hand, 
hare^  /.  hair-shirt  worn  next  the 

skin  by  penitents  (OE.  hxre). 
hare^  =  haer^,  §§  15,  70. 
hebben,  wkv.  have,  §§  39,  81,  94, 

97. 
heden,  adv.  to-day. 
heet,  adj.  hot  (OE.  hat),  §  23. 
-heide,  §  58. 
helen,    IV.    hide,    conceal    (OE. 

helan),  §  88. 
helpen,  hulpen.  III.  help,  §  87. 
hemel,  m.  heaven,  §  10. 
hemelblau,  n.  sky-blue. 
hemelrike,  n.  kingdom  of  heaven, 
hen  =  het  en,  §  38. 
henen,  adv.  hence,  away  (OE.  heo- 

nan). 
herberghe,/.  lodging,  shelter  (ME, 

hereberge). 
herds,  adv.  very  (OE.  hearde). 
here,  m.  Lord  (OE.  hearra). 
herte,  nf.  heart,  §  58. 
het,  dpers.pron.  ntr.,  it,  §  70. 
heten,  VII.  trans,  call ;  intr.  to  be 

called  ;  w.  d.  command,  §  23,  91, 
hets  =  het  es  (is),  §  28. 
heves,  2  p.s.  pres.  of  hebben,  §  45. 
heylech(g),  adj.  holy  (OE.  hclUg), 

§23. 
heymelike,  -Ijjc, «(/«?.  secretly,  §  23, 
hi,  S2:)ers.pron.  ms.  he,  §  70. 
hier,  adv.  here.     In  combination 

with  prepp.  and  advv. :  -af  (1. 854), 

-na  (1.  919),  -omme  (1.  62),  §  21. 


GLOSSARY 


85 


hiet,  pret.  of  heten,  §  91. 
hilt(d),  hilde,  pret.  of  houden. 
hinder,  mn.  hindrance,  distress. 
hinc(g),  pret.  of  hanghen,  §  92. 
hoe,  adv.  how,  §  41. 
hoede,/.  care,  protection. 
hoeo,  m.  comer  (cogn.  w.  OE.  haca, 

corner), 
hoet  =  hoe  et. 
hoeter  =  hoe  et  er. 
hone,  /.  ignominy,  deceit  (cf.  OE. 

heart  adj.),  §  23. 
hongher,  m.  hunger,  §  9. 
hont(d),  m.  dog,  §  9. 
hooft,  hoot(d),  n.  head  (OE.  Ma- 

fod),  §§  23,  28,  45. 
ho(o)ghelike,  adv.  highly,  §  45. 
hoot  =  hooft,  §  45. 
hoo*t-cleet(d),  n.  head-dress, 
hopen,  wTcv.  hope. 
hore,  dasf.  ofBpers.pron.  her,  §  15. 
horen,  wkv.  hear,  §§  7,  23. 
houden,  VII.  hold,  §§  17,  91. 
hoven  =  oven,  §  41  note  2. 
hovesch,  adj.  courtly,  gentle,  §  65. 
hoy,  n.  hay,  a  straw,  §§25,  26. 
hulpe,/.  help,  §  13. 
hulpen  =  helpen,  §  17  note. 
huus,  n.  house  ;  thuus,  adv.  home 

(1.  1020),  §§  21,  51. 
huve,/.  hood  (OE.  hil/e,  ME.  houve). 


iemen,  indef.  pron.,  some  one,  any 

one  (OS.  eoman),  §  79 h. 
ierst,  adj.  adv.  first  (OE.  xrest),  §  23, 

note  2. 
let,    yet,   indef .  pron.    something, 

anything,  §  79  i. 
ijseren,  adj.  iron  (OE.  tsem),  §  32. 
ie,  1  pers.  pron.  I,  §  70. 
in^  =  ic  en,  §  38. 
in^,  prep.  w.  d.  and  a, ;  ado.  in. 
inde  =  ende,  §  18. 


ja,  yes. 

jaer,  n.  year,  §  52. 

jaet  =  ja  et. 

jeghen,  prep.  w.  d.  and  a.  to,  to- 
wards, in  comparison  with,  §§  45, 
48. 

jo'fiFrouwe  =  joncfrouwe. 


jonc(g),  adj.  young ;  sh.p.  jonghe, 

young  people  (1.  196). 
jo-ng(h)elinc(g),  m.  young    man, 

youth  (OE.  geongling). 
jo'ncfrouwe,  joflfrouwe,  /.  young 

lady,  damsel,  §  40. 
jongher,  m.  child,  §  55. 
jo'nchere,  jonc-,  m.  young  man, 

youth,  §  6. 

K,  C  (§  38,  note). 

caproe'n,  mn.  hood,  §  6. 
carita'te,  /.  charity,  alms,  §  6. 
carmen,  wkv.  cry  (OE.  cearm,  sb.). 
kennen,  kinnen,  wkv.  know  (OE. 

c§nnan),  §  18. 
keren,  wkv.  turn,  rejl.  go,  §  23. 
kerke,/.  church,  §§  5,  15. 
keyseri'nne,/.  empress,  §§  5,  6,  23. 
keytij*f(v),  m.  caitiff. 
ki'ndekijn,    pi    kinderkine,    n. 

little  child,  §  53  note. 
kinnen  =  kennen. 
kint(d),  n.  child,  §  53. 
claer,  adj.  clear. 
claeTheit(d),/.  clearness, 
claghe,/.  complaint. 
claghen,  wkv.  complain,  §  28. 
cleden,  wkv.  clothe. 
cleet(d),  n.  dress,^?.  cleder,  clothes 

(OE.  cldj?),  §§  23,  53. 
cleine,  clene,  adj.  little  (cf.  groot) 

(OE.  cldene),  §§  23,  68. 
clo'cseel,  n.  bell-rope    (OE.   sal). 

§§6,23. 
clooster,    nm.    cloister,    convent, 

§§  5,  23,  57. 
cnielen,  wkv.  kneel,  §  23. 
cochte,  pret.  of  copen,  §  97. 
coenlijc,  adv.  fearless  (OE.  cenlice). 
co'man  (<coopnian),  m.  merchant, 

pedlar  (OE.  ceapman),  §  38. 
comen,  IV.  come,  happen,  §§  82 

note,  83,  88. 
conforte'ren,  wkv.  comfort,  §  6. 
eonfuu's,  adj.  confused,  §  6. 
connen,  pret.pres.  be    able  (OE. 

cunnan),  §§  9,  101. 
co(n)ste,  pret.  of  connen. 
cont(d),  adj.  known,  informed  (OE. 

ctijf). 
coor,  mn.  choir,  chancel, 
copen,  wkv.  buy  (OE  clepan),  §§  23, 

97. 


86 


BEATRIJS 


cordewae'n,  adj.  cordwain,  §  6. 
co'rtelike,    adv.    in    short    time, 

quickly, 
costeri'nne, /.  sacristan,  §  6. 
co'stersse,/.  sacristine. 
couse,/.  stocking,  §  42. 
co-vel(e),/m.  hood  (OE.  cuffle),  §  14. 
cove'nt,  covi'nt,  n.  convent,  §§  18, 

36  note, 
cracht,/.  force,  power  (OE.  crdeft), 

§44. 
crane,  adj.  poor,  scanty,  sick. 
cra'ncheit(d),  /.  sickness. 
cruce,/»t.  cross,  §§  5,  42. 
orupen,  II.  creep. 
cruut(d),  n.  herb,  grass. 
QUBQen^whv.  kiss  (OE.  cyssan),  §§  13, 


lacen,  alas ! 

lach(g),  pret.  of  ligghen. 
lachen,  VI.  laugh,  §§  12,  41,  90. 
lachter,  mn.  vice,  shame,  ignominy 

(OE.  leahtor). 
lachterlijc,   adj.   shameful,    igno- 
minious, 
lampte,/.  lamp, 
langhe,  lane,  adv.  long. 
lanc(g),  adj.  long,  §  40. 
lant(d),  n.  land. 

lanx,  adv.  along,  vertically,  §  40. 
lat,  adj.  slow  (OE.  Idet). 
late,  adj.  adv.  late,  sm^?.  lest :  ten 

lesten,  at  last  (1.  655),  §  68. 
laten,  VII.  let,  allow,  leave,  fail 

{w.g.,  11.  716,  769),  forsake,  refuse, 

w;.^.,  §§21,  91. 
lede,  pi.  of  lit. 
leetS  leit(d),  adj.  loth  (OE.  laj?) ; 

enen   leet    hebben,   dislike   (1. 

266),  §  23. 
leet(d)'',  pret.  of  liden. 
leet^,leit,  Zp.s.pres.  ind.  of  ligghen. 
legghen,    wkv.    lay   (OE.    l^cgan); 

legghen  voren,  propose  (1.  378), 

§§  93,  94,  95. 
leiden,  whv.  lead,  §  23. 
lesen,  V.  read,  recite,  pray,  gather 

(OE.  lesan),  §  89. 
lest,  sup.  of  late, 
leven^,  wkv.  live  (OE.  lifian). 
leven^  n.  life. 
li'chame,  mn.  body,  person,  §§  6, 

22,  32,  41,  59. 


licht,  n.  light. 

lichten,  v)kv.  shine. 

liden,  I.  go,  pass  (OE.  llpan),  §§  21, 

83,  85. 
liede,  mp.  people  (OE.  Uode),  §  23. 
lief,  adj,  dear ;  adv.  comp.  liever, 

rather ;  mf.  sweetheart,  darling 

(OE.  leof),  §§  23,  67. 
lieghen,  II.  lie  (OE.  leogan),  §§  23, 

86. 
li'en,  whv.  confess,  §  27. 
liep,  pret.  of  lopen,  §  91. 
\iett  ptret.  of  laten,  §  91. 
lieve,/.  love. 

ligghen,  V.  lie  (OE.  licgan),  §  89. 
lijf,  n.  life,  body,  §§  21,  59. 
list,/,  cunning  (OE.  list). 
lit(d),  n.  limb,  joint  (OE.  lij?\  §  10. 
locht,/.  air  (cf.  OE.  hjft),  §§  9,  44. 
loech,^re^.  of  lachen. 
lof(v),  mn.  praise,  honour, 
lonen,  tvhv.  reward  (OE.  leanian). 
looGhl^g) ,  pret.  of  lieghen. 
loon,  n.  reward  (OE.  lean),  §  23. 
loos,  adj.  false  (OE.  leas),  §  23. 
lopen,    VII.    run    (OE.    hlSapan), 

§§  23,  41,  91. 
loven,  tvJcv.  praise. 
luden,  wkv.  sound,  ring  (OE.  hl§- 

dan),  §§  21,  41. 
luttel,  adj.  little ;  sh,  a  little,  §§  13, 

33,  68. 


M 


macht,/.  might,  power. 

mael,  mfn.  time  ;  te  male,  entirely 

(1.  231)  (OE.  mdel). 
maer,  conj.  but,  §§28,  31,  46. 
m.ag(li)edooni,  mn.  maidenhood. 
niagliet(d),/.  maiden,  maid, 
maken,  wkv.  make  ;  rejl.  to  prepare 

to  go,  proceed,  §  28. 
man,  m.  man,  husband,  vassal  (L 

523). 
manen,  wkv.  remind,  beseech  (OE. 

manian). 
mantel,  m.  mantle, 
mate,  /.  measure ;    uter  maten, 

exceedingly  (11.  432,  987). 
mede,  adv.  besides,  also,  §§  6,  31. 
medevoeren,  tvkv.  carry  along, 
meer,  adv.,  comp.  of  vele,  more, 

further,    henceforth;    min    no 

meer,  exactly  (1.  695),  §§  23,  68. 


GLOSSARY 


87 


men,  inde/.pron.   people,   one,   § 

79  k. 
menech(g),  adj.  sh.  many ;  menech 

werven,  often  ;  (die)  meneghe, 

many  a  one  (11.  49,  518),  §  79  d. 
nieneclifout(d),  acT/.  manifold,  §  17. 
menen,  ivkv.  mean,  §  23. 
mensche,  m.  man,  human  being, 

§§  12,  37. 
menschelijc,  adj.  human, 
mere,  adj.  (comp.  of  groot),  greater, 

§68. 
merken,  tvkv.  observe,  see. 
merren,  tvJcv.  tarry  (OE.  mien'an). 
mes,  n.  knife  (OE.  m^tseax),  §  12. 
mesdaet(d),/.  misdeed. 
mes-winde,/w.  distress,  §  18. 
met(d),  prep.  w.  d.  and  a.,  adv.  with, 

besides  (OE.  mid),  §  31. 
me'ttenen,  mettine,  metten,  fp. 

matins,  §§  5,  6,  12,  30. 
me'ttenstonde,  /.    the    hour    of 

matins,  §  6. 
middemacht,  /.  (orig.  ds.  of  mid- 

(de)nacht),  midnight, 
mier,  gp.  of  mijn,  §  46. 
mijn,  poss.  pron.  my,  §  73. 
min,  adv.   [comp.  of  luttel),  less. 

mln  no  meer,  exactly  (1.  695), 

§68. 
minder,  adj.  [comp.  of  clene),  less, 

smaller,  §§  39,  68. 
minne,  /.  love,  beloved  (esp.  in  the 

vocative), 
minnen,  wkv.  love, 
minst,  adj.  {sup.  of  clene),  least, 

smallest,  §  68. 
mira'cle,  mieracle,  fn.   miracle, 

§6. 
moede,  adj.  tired,  weary  (OE.  w^e). 
moeder,  /.  mother,    moeder  eene, 

quite  alone  (1.  788),  §  54. 
moet(d),  m.  heart  (OE.  mod), 
■moeten  tpret.pres.  may,  shall,  ought 

to,  must  (OE.  mot),^  104. 
moghen,  pret.  pres.  may,  be  able, 

shall,  have  reason  to  (OE.  mdez), 

§103. 
mont(d),  m.  mouth,  §  9. 
mordenare,  m.  murderer,  §  46. 
morg(h)en,  m.    morning,     smor- 

g(h)ens,  in  the  morning  (11.  329, 

974)  (OE.  morgen). 
mure,  muur,  mf.  wall,  §  5. 


N 


na,  adv.,  prep.  w.d.  and  a.  after, 
according  to.  na  dat,  conj.  since 
(1.893),  §41. 

nacbt,  nach,  fm.  night,  snaohs 
(1.  620),  in  the  night,  te  nacht, 
to-night  (1.  885),  §  38. 

naect,  adj.  naked,  §  28. 

name,  mf.  name. 

natu're,/.  nature,  §  6. 

ne,  (e)n,  (1)  negative  particle  used 
in  combination  with  negative 
advv.  and  pronouns,  en  si  dat, 
unless.  (2)  enclitic  conj.,  con- 
necting a  dependent  clause  to  a 
principal  sentence  containing  a 
negative  statement :  maer  em- 
mer  en  lietsi  aehter  niet  |  sine 
las  alle  daghe  met  trouwen  \ 
die  seven  ghetiden  van  onser 
vrouwen  (11.  467-70),  but. 

neder,  adv.  down  (OE.  niper),  §§  6, 
10. 

ne'derlegghen,  wkv.  lay  down. 

ne'dersitten,  V.  sit  down. 

negheen,  gheen,  indef.  pron,  not 
any^  none,  §§  65,  79. 

nemen,  IV.  take,  §  88. 

nemmeer,  nothing  more,  §  22. 

nemmermeer,  -mere,  adv.  never- 
more. 

neven,  adv., prep.  w.d.  and  a.  be- 
sides, beside,  §  29. 

nie,  nye,  adv.  never. 

niemen,  nyeman,  indef.  pron.  no 
one,  §  79h. 

niet,  (1)  indef. pron.  nothing ;  (2) 
adv.  not,  §§  41,  79  i. 

niewer,  adv.  nowhere,  §  32  note. 

no,  conj.  nor.  no  —  no  (1.  32), 
weder  —  no  (1.  656),  neither  — 
nor. 

nooh.^  adv.  still,  yet,  besides. 

nochtan  (<  noch  dan),  adv.  yet, 
still,  nevertheless. 

noemen,  wkv.  name. 

nonne,/.  nun. 

noot(d),  mf.  need,  distress,  §§  23,59. 

nopen,  ivkv.  urge. 

noyt,  adv.  never.  In  indefinite 
and  negative  statements :  ever 
(1.  527). 

nu,  adv.  now. 

nye  =  nie,  nyemen  =  niemen. 


88 


BEATEIJS 


ocht  =  oft(e). 

of,  cofij.  if. 

oft(e),  ocht,  conj.  or,  if.    weder  — 

ofte,  whether  —  or  (1.  47)  (OE. 

oJ^J^e),  §  44. 
oghe,  nf.  eye  (OE.  ea^e),  §§  23,  58. 
owL(in.e)fprep.  adv.  about,  for.    om 

dat,  because  (1. 261) ;  hier  omme, 

for  this  reason  (1.  62)  (OE.  ymh), 

§§  13,  31,  40. 
on-,  pre/,  un-,  §§  6,  9. 
onbequa'me,  adj.  loathsome, 
onbescou'den,  adj.  unscolded,  un- 
punished, §  17. 
onder,  prep.  w.  d.  and  a.,  under,  §  9. 
ondercu'ssen,  wkv.  recipr.  kiss  each 

other,  §  6. 
ondervi'nden.  III.  experience,  find 

out,  §  6. 
ongheso'nt(d),  adj.  sick,  ill. 
onghetroo'st,    adj.    inconsolable, 

uncared-for,  §  28. 
o'ngheval,  7i.  misfortune. 
onghewro'ken,    adj.    unavenged 

(OE.  univrecen). 
onnen,  pret.pres.  grant  (OE.  un- 

nan),  §§  9,  101. 
o'nrecht,  n.  wrong,  injustice  (OE. 

unrikt),  §  6. 
ona,  pers.  pro)i.  dap.  of  ic,us,  §§  9, 70. 
ons(e),  poss.pron.  our,  §§  28,  31,  73. 
onso'chte,  adv.  hard,  in  discomfort, 
ont-,  prefix,  with  privative  force, 

§§  6,  9. 
ontbie'den,  II.    announce,    com- 
mand, 
ontde'cken,  wkv.  uncover,  discover, 

publish,  §  93. 
ontdoe'n,  ativ.  open, 
ontfae'n,  VII.  receive,  §§  42,  91. 
ontfa'rmen,  tvkv.  impers.  w.  a.  and 

g.  have  mercy  upon    (cf.    OE. 

ofearmian). 
ontfe*rmecheit(d),/.  mercy, 
ontfe'rmelike,  adv.  piteously. 
ontfeTmenisse,/  pity,  §  15. 
ontgae'n,  VII.  w.d.  escape,  §  42 

note. 
onthe*lt(d),  pret.  of  onthou'den. 
onthou'den,  VII.  keep,  support, 
ontplu'ken,  II.  unfold,  §  86. 
cntslu'ten,  II.  unlock,  §  86. 
ontspri'nghen,  III.  start  up. 


onvergou'den,  adj.  unrequited 
(OE.  unforgolden) ,  §  17. 

onversa'ghet(d),  adj.  adv.  fearless, 
§§  28,  42. 

ooc,  adv.  also,  indeed  (OE.  eac),  §  23. 

oost,  (1)  adv.  eastward  ;  (2)  n.  east, 
§23. 

ootmoe'dechede, /.  mercy,  §  23. 

ootmoe'delijo,  adv.  humbly  (OE. 
eaj>mddlice),  §  23. 

op,  prej).  adv.  upon,  into,  to ;  up, 
open,  op  dat,  if,  supposing  that 
(1.  319),  §  6. 

open,  adj.  open. 

openba're,  -baer,  adv.  in  public, 
generally  known. 

o'pgheven,  V.  surrender. 

ophe'fifen,  VII.  raise,  commence 
(OE. /^g&&an),  §§  6,  90. 

o'pstaen,  VI.  rise. 

opten  =  op  den,  §  40. 

oTdeel,  n.  judgement  (OE.  orddl), 
§§  6,  23. 

o'rconde,  mf.  witness,  §§  6,  58. 

oTconden,  wkv.  testify,  make 
known,  §  6. 

oTlof(v),  m.  permission  to  go,  leave, 
§6. 

orloy*,/«.  clock,  §  6. 

omame'nt,  n.  ornament,  §  6. 

out(d),  adj.  old,  sh.p.  oude,  old  peo- 
ple (1. 196),  §  17. 

ou'taer,  nm.  altar,  §§  5,  6,  17,  32. 

oven,  hoven,  m.  oven. 

over,  (1)  prep.  w.  d.  and  a.  place : 
over  al  (11.  332,  1015),  every- 
where ;  over  een  velt  (1.  164), 
across  a  field ;  time,  future :  over 
.vni.  nachte  (1.  147),  after  eight 
nights;  past:  over  .Xllll.  iaer 
(1.  801),  fourteen  years  ago ; 
identity  :  over  waer  (11.  30,  239), 
for  truth ;  over  dieveghe,  as  a 
thief.  (2)  adv.  exceedingly :  over 
groot  (1.  751). 

o'verbringhen,  wkv.  spend. 


paer,  n.  pair,  §  52. 

paert(d),  n.  horse,  §§  5,  6,  16. 

pant(d),  nm.  pledge,  security,  pro- 
perty, teren  vanden  panda 
(1.  411),  live  on  the  money  raised 
on  pawned  property. 


GLOSSARY 


pels,  m.  coarse  undergarment  (OE. 

pil{e)ce  <  Lat.  pellicia). 
penite'ncie,/.  penitence,  §  6. 
pe*nninc(g),  w.  penny,  pi.  money 

{OE.  p§7iing)f  ^  12. 
perdoe'n,  n.  pardon, 
pine,/,  pain,  §§  5,  20. 
pinen,  wkv.  labour,  exert  one's  self. 
plach(g),  pret.  of  pleghen. 
plaghe,  /.  calamity,  plague, 
pleghen,  IV.  be  in  the  habit  of, 

§89. 
poent(e),  nfm.  point,  qumtessence. 
pont(d),  n.  pound,  §§  5,  9,  52. 
poort,/.  port,  town,  §§  5,  16. 
pretioo's,  adj.  precious,  §§  6,  38. 
prie*mtijt(d),  /.  the  first  hour  of 

the    day,    6  o'clock  a.m.  (ME. 

pj'ime-tide). 
prime,  /.    the  Divine    ofiice    ap- 
pointed for  the  first  hour  of  the 

day. 
prisen,  whv.  praise,  §  36. 
proeven,  wkv.  prove,  try,  inquire. 


quaet(d),  adj.  evil  (cf.  OE.  cwead, 

'  dung '). 
quale,/,  misery  (OE.  cwalu). 
qualijc,  adv.  badly,  hardly,  §  38. 
quam,  pret.  of  comen,  §  88  note  2. 
quedden,  wkv.  greet,  address  (cf. 

OE.  cividdian),  §§  28,  93. 
quite,  quijt,  adj.w.g.  free,  devoid 

of. 

R 

raden,  VII.  advise,  §  91. 

raet(d),  m.  advice. 

-re  =  er,  §  47. 

rechtS  n.  right,    na  recht  (1.  171), 

properly,    met  rechte  (1.  831), 

with  good  reason, 
recht'^,  adj.  right,  straight, 
recken,  wkv.  extend,  stretch  (OE. 


reet(d),  reden,  pret.  of  riden. 
religioo'n,  n.  state  of  life  bound 

by  monastic  vows,  §  6. 
re  van,  wkv.  rave, 
reyne,    adj.    clean,    pure    (Goth. 

hrains),  §§  23,  41. 
riden,  I.  ride,  §  85. 
riep,  pret.  of  roepen,  §  91. 


ries,  adj.  foolish. 

riet(d),  pret.  of  raden. 

rikeS  adj.  rich;  sb.p.  the  rich  (1. 

504);  adv.  abundantly  (1.  339). 
rike^  n.  realm,  kingdom  (OE.  rice). 
rinnen.  III.  run,  flow  (OE.  ieman), 

§87. 
roepen,  VII.  call,  cry  (OE.  hropan), 

§§  41,  91. 
roc,  m.  upper  garment,  skirt  (OE. 

rocc). 
roTs.en,  pret.  pi.  of  ruken. 
root(d),  adj.  red,  §  23. 
rossi'de,  n.  horse  (cf.  0.  E.  D.  s.v. 

rouncy),  §  6. 
rouwe,  fm.    sorrow   (OE.  hreow), 

§§  26,  41. 
rouwen,    wkv.    cause    repentance 

(OE.  hreowan),  §  86. 
ruken,  11.  smell  (cf.  OE.  reocan,  E. 

reek),  §  86. 
rumen,  wkv.  leave. 
ruste,  /.  rest. 
ru(u)sten,  wkv.  intrans.  and  rejl. 

rest. 

S(§42) 

sach,  saghen,  §  21,  pret.  of  sien. 
sadelen,  wkv.  saddle. 
saen,  adv.  soon,  §  21. 
sake,/,  matter,  thing  (OE.  sacu). 
sal,  salt,  saelt,  pres.  ind.  of  sullen, 
sacristi'e, /.  sacristy,  §  6. 
saluu't,  mn.  greeting,  §  6. 
samen,  adv.  together.    t(e)  samen, 

together  (OE.  samen). 
Sanders  =  des  anders. 
sano(g),  pret.  of  singhen. 
Savons  =  des  avon(t)s. 
scaden,    wkv.    do    mischief   (OE. 

scajjian). 
scaerla'ken,  n.  red  cloth,  §  16. 
scame,/.  shame, 
scamelijc,  adj.  shameful, 
scande,/.  disgrace  (OE.  scand). 
scat,  m.  treasure  (OE.  sceatt). 
sceden,  VII.  separate,  depart  (OE. 

scddan),  §§  23,  91. 
sceen,  scheen,  pret.  of  scinen. 
scenden,    scinden,  wkv.    put    to 

shame,  destroy  (OE.  sc§ndan), 
sceppen,  VII.  shape  (OE.  scieppan), 

§90. 
Bciere,  adv.  soon,  quickly,  at  once, 

§21. 


90 


BEATKIJS 


sciet(d),  pret.  of  sceden. 
scinden  =  scenden,  §  18. 
scinen,  I.  appear,  become  visible 

(OE.  scinaii),  §  85. 
scoe,  m.  shoe,  §§  41,  57. 
scone,  adj.  beautiful  (OE.  sdene), 

§39. 
scoo'nlie(i)de,  -heit,  fn.  beauty, 

jewellery,  §  58. 
scoren,  wkv.  tear,  destroy,  make 

ineffective,  §  14. 
sede,  mf.  manner  (OE.  siduX  §§  10, 

58. 
seder,  zeder,  adv.  since  (OE.  sli^or), 

§10. 
see,  zee,  /.  sea,  §§  23,  48. 
segghen,   wJcv.    say  (OE.  secgan), 

§§  94,  95. 
seit,  3  p.s.  pres.  ind.  of  segghen, 

§24. 
seker,  adj.   certain ;   adv.   indeed 

(OE.  sicor),  §  10. 
se'kerlike,  adv.  certainly. 
selden,  adv.  seldom. 
selc  =  sulc. 
selve,  adj.  sh.  self,  same. 
se'lverijn,  adj.  silver  (OE.  sylfren), 

§32. 
senden,  sinden,  wTcv.  send,  §  36. 
sere,  adv.  much,  greatly  (OE.  sdre). 
sercoo't  =  sorcoo't. 
sermoe'n,  n.  sermon,  §  6. 
setten,  wTcv.  set,  §  93. 
seve(n),  seven,  §§  10,  46,  80. 
siS  "^  p.s.  pres.  subj.  of  sijn,  be. 
si^  3  pers.  ptvn.  nsf.  and  np.  she, 

they,  §  70. 
sideS  zide,  /.  side, 
side^  /.  silk  (OE.  side,  Lat.  seta\ 

§§  5,  20. 
siecheit(d), /.  illness,  sickness,  §  23. 
siele,  ziel(e),/.  soul, 
sien,  V.  see,  §§  24,  41,  89. 
sijn^  pron.  poss.  his,  its,  §  73. 
sijn^,  anv.  be,  §§  81,  106. 
sin,  m.  sense  (11.  3,  231,  589),  heart 

(11.  90,  126,  317),  love  (1.  119). 
sinden  =  senden. 
singhen.  III.  sing,  §  87. 
sint(d),  prep,  since,    sint  dat,  conj. 

since  (OE.  si/?). 
sitten,  V.  sit,  sit  down,  §  89. 
slachten,  wkv.  resemble. 
slaen,  VI.  strike,  cast  (OE.  slean), 

§§  27,  41,  90. 


slaep,  m.  sleep. 

slapen,  VII.  sleep,  §  91. 

sliep,  pret.  of  slapen. 

slotel,  m.  key,  §  14. 

smaken,  wJev.  have  a  savour,  taste 

(ME.  smaken). 
smal,  adj.  little,  thin,  slim ;  sh.f. 

die  scone  smale  (1.  192),  the 

lovely  fair  one. 
smerte,/.  smart,  pain, 
snel,  adj.  quick  (OE.  snell). 
sneven,  wkv.  fall,  stumble,  sin. 
sochte*,    adj.    soft,     quiet  ;    adv. 

quietly,  peaceably,  §§  44,  46. 
socht(e)^,  pret.  of  soeken,  §  97. 
soeken,  wkv.  seek,  §§  21,  97. 
soete,    suete,    adj.    sweet ;     adv. 

sweetly  (1.  336) ;  sh.n.  tsuete  (1. 

140),  sweetness,  §§  21,  48. 
soghen,  wkv.  suckle,  §  23. 
so'ndare,   sonder(e),    m.    sinner, 

§50. 
sonde,/,  sin,  §  13. 
sondech(g),  adj.  sinful, 
sondelijc,  adj.  sinful. 
sender,  prep,  without  (OE.  sundor, 

adv.),  I  9. 
so'nderlinghe,  adv.  especially. 
so*nders(s)e,  zondersse,/.  sinner, 
sone,  m.  son,  §§  10,  50. 
Sonne,/,  sun. 
so(o),  adv.  so.    Often  preceding  the 

predicate  when  this,  in  its  turn, 

precedes    the    subject :    u    soo 

waren   bat   bequame  |  scone 

ghewaden  (1.  264),  daer  soo  be- 

quaemt  hem  wale  (1.  404),  §§  48, 

64  note, 
sorghen,  wkv.  be  anxious  (OE.  sor- 

gian). 
sorcoo't,  sercoo't,  mn.  a  woman's 

jacket  without  sleeves. 
soude,  pret.  of  sullen,  §  17. 
spade,  adj.  adv.  late  (cf.  Goth.  comp. 

spediza),  §  68. 
sparen,  wkv.  trans,  spare  ;  intrans. 

tarry. 
spel,  n.  game. 

spelen,  wkv.  play  (OE.  spilian). 
spinnen.  III.  spin,  §  87. 
spise,  /.  food  (med.  Lat.  spesa  < 

spensa),  §§  5,  20. 
spoet(d),/m.  speed, 
spreken,  IV.   speak,    utter    (OE. 

sprecan),  §§  10,  82  note,  88, 


GLOSSAEY 


91 


Btade,  /.  opportunity,  good  con- 
dition,  aid.     in  staden  staen 

(11.  444,  744,  863),  aid  {vb.). 
staen,  standen,  VI.  stand,  §  90. 
stare,  adj.  strong  (OE.  stearc),  § 

15. 
stat(d),/m.  place,  town  UOE.  st§de) 
stede,  fm.  place,  town  j   §  50  note, 
steken,  V.  tranfs.   prick;  inUxins. 

stick,  remain  fixed  (cogn.  w.  OE. 

stician),  §  89. 
stemme,/.  voice  (OE.  stemn)^  §  46. 
sterven.   III.  die   (OE.   steorfan), 

§87. 
sti'llekine,  adv.  quietly. 
stoet(d),  pret.  of  staen. 
stonde,  /.  hour,  short  period  of 

time  (OE.  stund). 
strael,  m.  arrow  (OE.  strM). 
strate,  /.  street,      siere  straten 

gaen,  go  away,  §§  5,  20. 
striken,  I.  trans,  rub,  stroke  ;  in- 

trans.  move,  go,  §  85. 
subtij'l,  adj.  refined,  §  36. 
suchten,  wkv.  sigh,  §§  22,  44. 
suer,  adj,  sour ;  sb.n.  tsuere  (1. 140), 

§§  8,  21. 
suete  =  soete,  §  8. 
sulc,  sale,  adj.  such ;  sb.  many  a 

one  (11.  46,  51),  §§  13,  79  c. 
sullen,  pret.  pres.  shall,  will.    Used 

as  an  auxiliary  of  the  future  tense 

and  the  imperative  mood,  §§  13, 

35  note,  81,  102. 
suverlijc,  adj.  pure,  beautiful ;  sb. 

suverlike,  pure  one  (11.  307, 340) 

(OE.  sy/re),  §  21. 
swaer,   zwaer,  adj.   heavy    (OE. 

swder),  §  39. 
swaerlike,  adv.  heavily. 
swert(d),  n.  sword, 
swighen,  I.  be  silent,  to.  g.  (1.  355) 

and  tram.  (1. 1012)  (OE.  swlgan), 

§85. 


tale,/,  words  spoken,  tale. 

te*,  (1)  prep.  w.  d.  and  a.  of  motion : 

to  (11.  85,  224) ;  rest :  at  (1.  543) ; 

to  form  the  supine  :  si  plach  te 

ludene  (1,  34),  te  wesen  (1.  27). 

(2)  adv.  too,  w.  adjj.  and  adw. :  te 
.    swaer  (1.  155),  te  groot  (1.  827), 

§§  29,  30,  81. 


te^  (<  de,  orig.  instr.  s.  of  dat), 
used  before  compp.,  the  (cf.  OE. 
M  port),  §  74. 

telt(d),  m.  trot,  sinen  (den)  telt 
riden,  varen,  trot. 

ten  ==  te  den,  §  30. 

teren,  wkv.  subsist  (cogn.  w.  OE. 
teran). 

termij'n,  m.  term,  period,  §  6. 

tes  (<  te  des),  conj.  until. 

tien,  II.  draw  (OE.  teon\  §§  24,  41, 
43,  86. 

tijt(d),/m.  time  (OE.  tid),  §  59. 

toe,  adv.  to,  §  6. 

toe'comen,  IV.  happen. 

toghen,  wTcv.  show  (OS.  togian, 
Goth,  ataugjan),  §  23. 

tonen,  wkv.  show  (<  toghenen). 

tooch,  pret.  of  tien. 

toren,  m.  grief  (OE.  torn),  §  33. 

torsen,  wkv.  load,  §  47. 

tot(e),  (1)  prep,  motion  :  to  ;  limita- 
tion :  to  (1.  661).  (2)  conj.  until, 
§31. 

trac,  pret.  of  treken. 

traghe,  traech,  adj.  lazy,  slow 
(OE.  trag),  §  61. 

traghen,  wkv.  tarry. 

treken,  IV.  draw,  go,  §  88. 

trone,  m.  throne,  canopy,  firma- 
ment. 

troost,  m.  comfort,  support,  §  23. 

troo'stelijc,  adj.  comforting. 

troosten,  wkv.  comfort. 

trooster,  m.  comforter. 

trouwe,/.  faith. 

trouwen,  adv.  in  truth,  faithfully. 

tsamen  =  samen,  §  28. 

tusschen,  ^jre^J.  between,  §  19. 

twee,  two,  §§  23,  80. 

twelf,  twelve,  §  80. 

twien,  wkv.  impers.  doubt  (OE. 
tweon),  §  24. 

twivel,  m.  doubt. 

twivelen,  wkv.  w.  g.  doubt. 

twi-veling(h)e,/  uncertainty. 


u 

u,  per&.j^on.  dap.  of  du,  §  70. 

ure,  /.  hour,  §  20. 

ute,  \ryxtyprep.  adv.  out  of,  out,  §§  6, 

31. 
u'tedoen,  wkv.  take  off. 
u'tegaen,  VII.  go  out. 


BEATEIJS 


u'telesen,  V.  select. 
uten,  uter  =  uut  den,  der,  §  40. 
u'tesceppen,  VII.  scoop, 
u'tetien,  II.  take  off. 
uutvercoren,  adj.  chosen. 
uw(e),  u,  2poss.pron.  your  (OLFr. 
iuwa,  OE.  eower),  §  73. 


vader,  m.  father,  §  54. 

vaec,  m.  drowsiness. 

vaen,VII.  catch  (OE./ow),  §§  27, 

91,  92. 
vaer,  m.  fear. 
vaert(d),  fm.  journey  (OE.  fierd), 

§16. 
van,  prep,  motion :  away  from  (1. 

311);  time  (starting-point):  from 

(1.    147) ;   agent  (with  passive) : 

by  ;  belonging :  of ;  origin :  from, 

out  of ;  relation :  concerning,  re- 
garding, 
vanden,  wkv.  visit  (OE.  fandian). 
vant(d),  pret.  of  vinden. 
vanghen  =  vaen,  §§91,  92. 
varen,  VI.  fare,  go,  travel,  §§  12, 90. 
vasten,  wkv.  fast, 
vel,^.  skin,  fur  (OE./^W)- 
vele,  n.  much;   adj.  many;   adv. 

(especially  before  comparatives) 

much,  §§  68,  79g. 
velen,    IV.    recommend.      Gode 

volen,  in   God's   keeping  (OE. 

feolan),  §§  41,  87  note  1,  88. 
velt(d),  n.  field,  §  42  note. 
ve'nsterkijn,  n.  little  window,  §§  5, 

6,  42  note, 
ver-,  §  6. 

verbeiden,  whv.  w.g.  await. 
verberghen.    III.   hide,    conceal, 

§87. 
verbidden,  V.  pray  urgently  (1. 

783),  save  by  prayer  (1.  675). 
verbouden,  wkv.  embolden ;  refi. 

take  courage,  §  17. 
verdi'nghen.  III.  plead  (dinghen) 

one's  cause  so  well  that  he  is 

acquitted, 
verdoemen,  wkv.  condemn,  curse 

{0^.  fordeman). 
verdriet,  n.  sorrow  (cf.  OE.J?reotan 

vb.),  §  23. 
verdriven,  I.  expel  (O'E.fordnfan). 
vergaen,  VII.  happen. 


vergheten,  V.  w.  g.  forget,  §  89. 

vergheven,  V.  forgive. 

verghinc(g),  pret.  of  vergaen. 

vergier  (g  =  dg),  m.  orchard,  §  5. 

vergronden,  wkv.  fathom. 

verhelen,  IV.  hide,  conceal  (OE. 
helan). 

verhoghen,  wkv.  intrans.  rejoice  j 
trans,  make  glad,  §  14. 

verkieaen.  III.  choose,  §§  23, 43, 86. 

verclaren,  wkv.  become  clear. 

vercochte,  pret.  of  vercopen. 

vercoos,  pret.  of  verkiesen. 

vercopen,  wkv,  sell,  §  97. 

vercoren,  adj.  chosen,  excellent 
(orig.  p.p.  of  verkiesen),  §  43. 

verladen,  VI.  overburden,  §  90. 

verlaten,  VII.  7'efi.  rely  upon  (to 
or  op),  §  91. 

verlenen,'  wkv.  lend,  grant  (OB. 
Idenan),  §  23. 

verlies,  nm.  loss. 

verliesen,  II.  lose  (OE.  forleosan)^ 
§§  23,  43,  86. 

verloossen,  wkv.  release,  save,  §  42. 

verloren,  p.p.  of  verliesen,  §  43. 

vermanen,  wkv.  urge,  beseech. 

vermonden,  wkv.  tell,  communi- 
cate. 

vememen,  IV.  notice,  observe,  in- 
quire. 

vernoy,  n.  annoyance,  distress. 

vemoyen,  wkv.  annoy. 

veronnen,  pret.  pres.  find  fault 
with,  blame,  §  101. 

verre,  adv.  far. 

verscuven,  II.  repel  (OE.  forsm- 
fan),  §  86. 

versien,  V.  notice. 

versmoren,  wkv.  smother  (OE. 
forsmorian),  §  7. 

versochten,  wkv.  heave  a  deep 
sigh. 

verstaen,  VI.  understand,  hear. 

verstoet(d),  pret.  of  verstaen. 

ver  tar  en  =  verteren,  §  15. 

vertel(l)en,  wkv.  narrate. 

verte'ren,  vertaren,  wkv.  consume 
(cogn.  w.  OE.  teran),  §  15. 

vertoghen,  wkv.  show. 

vertrecken,  tvkv.  narrate. 

verva'luen,  wkv.  fade,  become  fal- 
low, §  33. 

ververen,  wkv.  frighten ;  re/l.  fear, 
§  21  note. 


GLOSSARY 


93 


vervroyen,  wkv.  gladden  ;  rejl.  re- 
joice, §  25. 

verwandelen,  wkv.  change. 

verwaten,  VII.  curse,  §  91. 

verweent(d),  adj.  luxurious,  wan- 
ton, splendid. 

verwecken,   wkv.    awake,   arouse 
(OE.  w§ccan). 

verwerven.  III.  obtain  (OE.  hweor- 
fan). 

verwijt,  nm.    reproach,    disgrace 
(cf.  OE.  edwit). 

vieTtien,  fourteen. 

vij'fhondert(d),  five  hundred,  §§  46, 
80. 

vinden.  III.  find,  §§  83,  87. 

vi'ngherlyn,  n.  ring. 

vinc(g),  pret.  of  vanghen,  §  92. 

vinken  =  vine  en,  §  40. 

vinstu,  §  38. 

visente'ren,  wkv.  visit,  §  46. 

vita,  /.  life-story  (Lat.  vita). 

vlamme,/.  fiame. 

vleesclieljjc,  adj.  fleshly,  carnal, 
§23. 

vlijt,  m.  eagerness,  zeal  (cf.  OE. 
JiUan). 

voe'deren,  wkv.  line  (cf.  OE.  fo- 
/)or,  n.). 

voeghen,  wkv.  suit. 

voeren,  voren,  wkv.  lead,  conduct, 
carry  {OE.feran). 

voet,  m.  foot. 

voghel,  m.  bird  (O'E.fugol). 

volghen,  wkv.  follow. 

volco'melijc,  adv.    perfectly,   en- 
tirely. 

volmae'ct,  adj.  perfect. 

vore,  voor,  vor,  (1)  pt^ep.  of  place  : 
in  front  of,  before  (11.  97,  102, 
203,  552) ;  time  :  vore  midder- 
nacht  (1.  193),  before  midnight ; 
order :  voor  alle  man  (1.  370), 
first  of  all  men ;  causal :  in  be- 
half of,  for  the  sake  of:  bidt 
vore  mi  (1.  439).  (2)  adv.  of 
place :  in  front  (1.  224) ;  time  : 
beforehand  (1.  506),  §  31. 
voren^,  adv.  before,  te  voren  (1. 
840),  before,  previously.  In  com- 
bination with  vbs. :  te  voren 
comen  (11.  724, 737),  appear  ;  (te) 
voren  legghen  (11.  364,  378), 
propose,  §§  6,  7. 


voren* 


voeren. 


vorme,/.  form,  shape. 

vo'rsprake, /.  mediator. 

vort,  voort,ac?v.  of  place :  forwards, 

on ;  of  time :  further,  henceforth. 

voort  meer  (1.  910),  henceforth 

(OE.forJ^),  §§  7,  16. 
vrame,/.  advantage. 
vremde,    vremt(d),  adj,    foreign 

{OE.  frem{e)de,fremj?e),  §  12. 
vrese,/.  fear  (cogn.  w.  OE.frdsian, 

♦tempt'),  §23. 
vri,  adj.  free,  noble ;  a  stock  epi- 
thet of  the  Virgin  Mary  (1.  535), 

§27. 
vrien,  wkv.  free  (OE.freogan),  §  27. 
vriendelike,  adv.  kindly, 
vriendi'nne, /.  friend,  §  6. 
vrient(d),  m.  friend,  §  24. 
vroe,  adv.  early,  §  8. 
vroet(d),  adj.  wise  (OE. /rod). 
vro(o),  adj.  glad,  §  8. 
vroude,/.joy,  §26. 
vrouwe,  /  woman,  lady,  mistress 

(cogn.  w.  OE.  frea),  §  26. 
vullen,  wkv.  fill  {OE.  fyllan),  §§  13, 

93. 
vysioe'n,  n.  vision,  §  6. 


W 


wachte,  /.  watch,  watchfulness, 
wachte  nemen  w.g.  (1.  148), 
look  out  for. 

wachten,  tvkv.  tv.  g.  wait  for. 

waen,  m.  expectation,  doubt.  Bon- 
der waen,  doubtless  (OE.  wen). 

waer^  (1)  adj.  true,  in  ware  dine 
(1.  833),  in  truth,  faithfully.  (2) 
n.  truth,  over  waer  (11.  30,  455, 
476),  for  ti-uth.  ghi  segt  waer 
(1.  950),  you  are  right. 

waer^,  adv.  where.  In  combination 
with  prepp.  and  advv. :  waer  bi 
(1.  586),  on  what  ground  ?  waer 
omme  (11.  240,  248),  why,  §  41. 

waerde  =  werde. 

waerheide, /.  truth,  §  58. 

waerlike,  adv.  verily,  truly. 

-waert,-wert(d),a(?t?.  tenclooster 
waert  (1.  788),  towards  the  con- 
vent, ter  Stat  wert  (1.  164),  to- 
wards the  town,  derwaert  (1. 
245),  thither ;  werwaert  (1.146), 
whither,  §§  15  note,  16. 

waest  =  was  et,  §  11. 


94 


BEATEIJS 


waken,  wkv.  be  awake,  keep  watch 

(OE.  wacian). 
wale  =  wel. 
wan,  pret.  of  winnen. 
wandelen,  whv.  trans,  alter, 
wanderen,  wkv.  go,  walk, 
wanen,  wkv.  think,  expect  (OE. 

wenan),  §  21. 
wa'nhope,/.  despair,  §  6. 
wane,  m.  hesitation,  doubt  (cf.  OE. 

wanc-ol,  adj.). 
want,  conj.  for,  as. 
warde  =  werde. 
ware,/,  care  (OE.  waru). 
warp,  pret.  of  worpen. 
wart{d\  pret.  of  werden. 
w^as,  war  en,  pret.  of  wesen. 
wat,  pron.  interr.  ntr.  what,  often 

followed  by  2i  gp. :  in  wat  lande 

(1. 595) ;  indef.  whatsoever  (1.  55) : 

in  wat  leven   ic   noy[t]   was 

(1.  527),  §  77. 
wech(g),  adv.  away,  §  29.  ^ 
wedde,  n.  pledge,  possession  (OE. 

wp^dd),  §  12. 
weder^,  adv.  again,  anew,  back, 
weder^,  conj.  whether,    weder  — 

ofte  (1. 47),  whether  —  or ;  weder 

—  no  (11. 656, 952),  neither  —  nor, 

§41. 
we'dernioet(d),  m.   despair  (OE. 

wijyermod),  §  6. 
we*dertale, /.  answer  (OE.  tviper- 

talu). 
we'duwe,/.  widow,  §^  10,  33. 
wee,   (1)  n.  woe,    pain ;    (2)   adv. 

sadly,     mi  es  wee  (1.  Ill),  I  am 

sad,  §  23. 
weeG,pret.  of  wiken. 
we(e)lde,/.  bliss  (M.E.  welthe). 
ween,  m.   wailing,  grief  (ci.  OE. 

wdnian),  §  23. 
weke,/.  week,  §  10. 
wel,  wale,  adv.  well,  greatly ;  n. 

weal,  bliss. 
wecken,  wkv.  arouse  (OE.  w§ccan), 

§93. 
wenden,  wkv.  go  (OE.  wendan). 
wenen,  wkv.  weep  (OE.  wdnian), 

§23. 
werde,  warde,  waerde,  /.  worth, 

value,  price,  treasure,  §§  15,  16. 
werden.  III,   become,   be   (as  an 

auxiliary  of  the  passive  voice) 

(OE.  iveorJ?an),  §§  81,  83,  87. 


werdech(g),  adj.  worthy. 
w^erelt(d),/.  world,  mankind, 
werf,  /.   (course    of)    time    (OE. 

hwearf,  '  exchange '),  §§  15,  41. 
werk,  n.  work, 
werken,  wkv.  work,  §  97. 
werwaert(d),  adv.  whither. 
wes,  gs.  of  wie,  wat. 
wese,  m.  orphan,  §  23. 
wesen,  V.  be.     Used  as  a  noun: 

being  (1.  209),  §§  89, 106. 
west,  adv.  westward. 
weten,  pret.pres.  know  (OE.  wdt)j 

§§  10,  23,  99. 
wi(e),  pi.  of  ic,  we,  §  70. 
wide,  adv.  wide,  far. 
wie,  pron.  interr.  who  ?  relat.  who ; 

indef.  whosoever,  §  77. 
wijf,  n.  woman  (OE.  wTf,  n.),  §  21. 
wijn,  m.  wine,  §  5. 
wijs,  adj.  wise. 
wiken,  I.  recede,  fly,  §  85. 
wile^/.  veil  (Lat.  velum),  §  20. 
wile^  /.  space  of  time,  while,  §  41. 
wilen,  adv.  whilom, 
willemij-n,  m.  a  member  of  the 

monastic   order  of  St.  William 

founded  by  Pope  Callixtus  II. 
willen,  wkv.  will,  wish,  want  to, 

§  107. 
winnen.  III.  win,  gain,  earn,  be- 
get, §  87. 
wise,/,  manner,  way  (OE.  wls(e)), 
wiselike,  adv.  wisely, 
wiste,  pret.  of  weten,  §  99. 
wit,  adj.  white;  sb.  met  witten 

gheeleet,  clad  in  white  (1.  934), 

§§  22  note,  41. 
wonden,  wkv.  wound,  §  9. 
wonder,  adj.  strange,  marvellous, 

§9. 
wonder,  n.  wonder,  miracle, 
worpen.  III.  throw  (OE.  weorpan), 

§§  15,  87. 
wo(o)rt(d),  n.  word,  §§  7,  16,  52. 
woude,  pret.  of  willen. 
wreken,  IV.  avenge  (OE.  wrecan). 
wulle,/.  wool,  §  13  note  1. 
wullen,   adj.  woollen,  clad  in  a 

woollen  cloak,  §  13. 


yemen,  yet  =  iemen,  iet. 
Z  =  S 


GLOSSARY 


95 


PROPER   NAMES 


A-bsolon  (1.  372). 
Be'atrijs  (1.  1029). 
Elve,  the  Elbe  (1.  611). 
Qero'nde,  the  Gironde  (1.  611),  §  5. 
Ghy-sbrecht,   Gilbert  (OE.   Gisl- 

heorht)  (1.  14),  §  47. 
Gi'semast,  Gesmas,  the  penitent 

thief  on  the  cross  (1.  654),  §  5. 


La-zarus  (1.  218),  §  60. 

Mari-a,  §§  27,  60. 

Na-zaret  (1.  543). 

Rome  (1.  785). 

Teo-phulus,  Theophilus  (1.  519). 

Venus  (11.  125,  366). 


OXFORD:    HORACE  HART  M.A. 
PRINTER  TO  THE  UNIVERSITY 


f 


RETURN    CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
TO"^    202  Main  Library 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2                       : 

3 

4 

5                                   ( 

b 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

Renewals  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due  date. 

Books  may  be  Renewed  by  calling        642-3405 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

i 

CiRCi. 

FFR  2  7  IQQfi 

B  A  k  1  A  O  ^n 

\\  Ci 

JAN  /  Z  19 

39 

SENT  ON  ILL 

NOV  1  S  ZUU6 

U.C.  BhKKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DD6 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CAl 
BERKELEY, 

.IFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

CA  94720 

(H)$ 

U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CQ2111t>1.3D 


^^W 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY